TI TMS32C6416EGLZA5E0

SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Signal Processors (DSPs)
− 2-, 1.67-, 1.39-ns Instruction Cycle Time
− 500-, 600-, 720-MHz Clock Rate
− Eight 32-Bit Instructions/Cycle
− Twenty-Eight Operations/Cycle
− 4000, 4800, 5760 MIPS
− Fully Software-Compatible With C62x
− C6414/15/16 Devices Pin-Compatible
VelociTI.2 Extensions to VelociTI
Advanced Very-Long-Instruction-Word
(VLIW) TMS320C64x DSP Core
− Eight Highly Independent Functional
Units With VelociTI.2 Extensions:
− Six ALUs (32-/40-Bit), Each Supports
Single 32-Bit, Dual 16-Bit, or Quad
8-Bit Arithmetic per Clock Cycle
− Two Multipliers Support
Four 16 x 16-Bit Multiplies
(32-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle or
Eight 8 x 8-Bit Multiplies
(16-Bit Results) per Clock Cycle
− Non-Aligned Load-Store Architecture
− 64 32-Bit General-Purpose Registers
− Instruction Packing Reduces Code Size
− All Instructions Conditional
Instruction Set Features
− Byte-Addressable (8-/16-/32-/64-Bit Data)
− 8-Bit Overflow Protection
− Bit-Field Extract, Set, Clear
− Normalization, Saturation, Bit-Counting
− VelociTI.2 Increased Orthogonality
Viterbi Decoder Coprocessor (VCP) [C6416]
− Supports Over 600 7.95-Kbps AMR
− Programmable Code Parameters
Turbo Decoder Coprocessor (TCP) [C6416]
− Supports up to 7 2-Mbps or
43 384-Kbps 3GPP (6 Iterations)
− Programmable Turbo Code and
Decoding Parameters
L1/L2 Memory Architecture
− 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1P Program Cache
(Direct Mapped)
− 128K-Bit (16K-Byte) L1D Data Cache
(2-Way Set-Associative)
− 8M-Bit (1024K-Byte) L2 Unified Mapped
RAM/Cache (Flexible Allocation)
Two External Memory Interfaces (EMIFs)
− One 64-Bit (EMIFA), One 16-Bit (EMIFB)
− Glueless Interface to Asynchronous
Memories (SRAM and EPROM) and
Synchronous Memories (SDRAM,
SBSRAM, ZBT SRAM, and FIFO)
− 1280M-Byte Total Addressable External
Memory Space
Enhanced Direct-Memory-Access (EDMA)
Controller (64 Independent Channels)
Host-Port Interface (HPI)
− User-Configurable Bus Width (32-/16-Bit)
32-Bit/33-MHz, 3.3-V PCI Master/Slave
Interface Conforms to PCI Specification 2.2
[C6415/C6416 ]
− Three PCI Bus Address Registers:
Prefetchable Memory
Non-Prefetchable Memory I/O
− Four-Wire Serial EEPROM Interface
− PCI Interrupt Request Under DSP
Program Control
− DSP Interrupt Via PCI I/O Cycle
Three Multichannel Buffered Serial Ports
− Direct Interface to T1/E1, MVIP, SCSA
Framers
− Up to 256 Channels Each
− ST-Bus-Switching-, AC97-Compatible
− Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Compatible (Motorola)
Three 32-Bit General-Purpose Timers
Universal Test and Operations PHY
Interface for ATM (UTOPIA) [C6415/C6416]
− UTOPIA Level 2 Slave ATM Controller
− 8-Bit Transmit and Receive Operations
up to 50 MHz per Direction
− User-Defined Cell Format up to 64 Bytes
Sixteen General-Purpose I/O (GPIO) Pins
Flexible PLL Clock Generator
IEEE-1149.1 (JTAG†)
Boundary-Scan-Compatible
532-Pin Ball Grid Array (BGA) Package
(GLZ and ZLZ Suffix), 0.8-mm Ball Pitch
0.13-µm/6-Level Cu Metal Process (CMOS)
3.3-V I/Os, 1.2-V/1.25-V Internal (500 MHz)
3.3-V I/Os, 1.4-V Internal (600 and 720 MHz)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Highest-Performance Fixed-Point Digital
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
C62x, VelociTI.2, VelociTI, and TMS320C64x are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Motorola is a trademark of Motorola, Inc.
† IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard-Test-Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture.
Copyright  2004 Texas Instruments Incorporated
!"#$% $%&$ $'("&%$ $ )(!% $ "(# %&$ $# )&#
' #*#+)"#$%, # %&%! ' #& #*# $&%# $ %# )&-#./
)#'0$- % #+#%(&+ &(&%#(%,
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
1
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table of Contents
revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
device characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
device compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram . . . . . . . . . . 10
CPU (DSP core) description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
memory map summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
peripheral register descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
EDMA channel synchronization events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
interrupt sources and interrupt selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
signal groups description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
device configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
multiplexed pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
debugging considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
development support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
device support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
clock PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
power-down mode logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-supply sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
power-supply decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMIF device speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bootmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
75
76
77
77
78
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
absolute maximum ratings over operating case
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
recommended operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of
supply voltage and operating case temperature .
78
79
79
80
recommended clock and control signal transition
behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
parameter measurement information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
input and output clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
asynchronous memory timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
programmable synchronous interface timing . . . . . . . . 91
synchronous DRAM timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
HOLD/HOLDA timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
BUSREQ timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
reset timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
external interrupt timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
host-port interface (HPI) timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) timing
[C6415 and C6416 only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
multichannel buffered serial port (McBSP) timing . . . . 119
UTOPIA slave timing [C6415 and C6416 only] . . . . . . 130
timer timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
general-purpose input/output (GPIO) port timing . . . . 134
JTAG test-port timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
mechanical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
REVISION HISTORY
This data sheet revision history highlights the technical changes made to the SPRS146K device-specific data
sheet to make it an SPRS146L revision.
Scope: Applicable updates to the C64x device family, specifically relating to the C6414, C6415, and C6416
devices, have been incorporated. Added C6414, C6415, and C6416 silicon revision 2.0 devices and associated
device-specific information at the production data (PD) stage of development.
The extended temperature devices for silicon revision 2.0 (C641x A-5E0, C641xA-6E3) are at the advance information (AI) stage of development. All other devices are at the Production Data (PD) stage of development.
PAGE(S)
NO.
2
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
1
Features:
Changed the Viterbi Decoder Coprocessor (VCP) [C6416] sub-bullet from “Supports Over 500 7.95-Kbps AMR” to
“Supports Over 600 7.95-Kbps AMR”
Changed the Turbo Decoder Coprocessor (TCP) [C6416] sub-bullet from “Supports up to Six 2-Mbps 3GPP (6 Iterations)”
to “Supports up to 7 2-Mbps or 43 384-Kbps 3GPP (6 Iterations)”
7
Description section:
“With performance of up to 5760 million instructions per second (MIPS) ...” paragraph
Changed “The C64x can produce four 32-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per ...” sentence to “The C64x can produce four
16-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per ...”
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PAGE(S)
NO.
7
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
Description section:
“The C6416 device has two high-performance embedded coprocessors [Viterbi Decoder Coprocessor (VCP) and Turbo
Decoder Coprocessor (TCP)] that ...” paragraph
Changed “The VCP operating at CPU clock divided-by-4 can decode over 500 7.95-Kbps adaptive multi-rate ...” sentence to
“The VCP operating at CPU clock divided-by-4 can decode over 600 7.95-Kbps adaptive multi-rate ...”
16
L2 architecture expanded section:
Added new section
Added Figure 2, TMS320C6414/C6415/C6416 L2 Architecture Memory Configuration
18
Peripheral register descriptions section:
Table 6, L2 Cache Registers:
Updated the “ACRONYM” and “REGISTER NAME” columns for the “0184 4000 through 0184 5004” HEX ADDRESS
RANGE
Added rows “0184 4018” and “0184 401C”
Changed the “0184 4038 − 0184 4FFC” HEX ADDRESS RANGE for the “Reserved” row to “0184 4038 − 0184 4044”
Added rows “0184 4048” and “0184 404C”
Added “Reserved” row “0184 4050 − 0184 4FFC”
22
Peripheral register descriptions section:
EDMA Parameter RAM table:
Updated associated table footnote from “The C64x device ...” to “The C6414/C6415/C6416 device ...”
66
Added “device support” section title (new)
66−67
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Changed “The TCP operating at CPU clock divided-by-2 can decode up to thirty-six 384-Kbps or six 2-Mbps turbo encoded
channels ...” sentence to “The TCP operating at CPU clock divided-by-2 can decode up to forty-three 384-Kbps or seven
2-Mbps turbo encoded channels ...”
Device and development-support tool nomenclature section:
Updated/changed “Table 30 displays the device part numbers and ordering information for ...” paragraph
Deleted Table 30, TMS320C6414/C6415/C6416 Device Part Numbers (P/Ns) and Ordering Information
Deleted the “TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped with ...” paragraph
Figure 5, TMS320C64x DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the C6414, C6415, and C6416 Devices):
Updated/changed the “For the actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, ...” footnote
Added, below Figure 5, “For additional information, see the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 Digital
Signal Processors Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ011)” paragraph (new)
68
Documentation support section:
Updated/moved the “How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 DSPs
application report (literature number SPRA718)” document reference
76
Power-supply decoupling section:
Updated/changed the “In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors ...”
paragraph
Added two subsequent paragraphs
78
Reset section:
Added new section
77
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement section:
Updated/added paragraphs for clarity
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
3
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PAGE(S)
NO.
87−88
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
Asynchronous Memory Timing section:
Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFA Module table:
Added/split silicon revisions “Rev 1.1 and earlier” and “Rev 2.0” for the MIN value of parameter #7 “th(EKO1H-ARDY), Hold
time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUTx high”
Added under the “−5E0, −6E3, −7E3” column, the MIN value of “1.3” ns for “Rev 2.0”
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Timing Requirements for Asynchronous Memory Cycles for EMIFB Module table:
Added/split silicon revisions “Rev 1.1 and earlier” and “Rev 2.0” for the MIN value of parameter #7 “th(EKO1H-ARDY), Hold
time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUTx high”
Added under the “−5E0, −6E3, −7E3” column, the MIN value of “1.3” ns for “Rev 2.0”
106
HOLD/HOLDA Timing section:
Timing Requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA Cycles for EMIFA and EMIFB modules table:
Changed parameter NO. 3 from “toh(HOLDAL-HOLDL)” to “th(HOLDAL-HOLDL)”
108
Reset Timing section:
Timing Requirements for Reset table:
Changed the MIN value of parameter No. 16, tsu(boot) from “4P” to “4E or 4C” ns
Added associated footnote to identify “E” and “C”
Added parameter NO. 18, “td(PCLK−RSTH) Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” with a MIN value of “32N” ns
Changed parameter NO. 18 description from “td(PCLK−RSTH) Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” to “tsu(PCLK-RSTH),
Setup time, PCLK active before RESET high”
Added associated footnote to identify “N” and restraints
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Reset table:
Moved parameter NO. 18, “td(PCLK−RSTH) Delay time, PCLK active to RESET high” to the Timing Requirements for Reset
table
Updated footnote symbols
111
Host-Port Interface (HPI) Timing section:
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions During Host-Port Interface Cycles table:
Added “mode, 2nd half-word” to parameter NO. 16 “td(HSTBL-HDV), Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid (HPI16 only)”
118
Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Timing [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY] section:
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for Serial EEPROM Interface table:
Changed parameter NO. 6 description from “tosu(DOV-CLKH), Output setup time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high” to
“tosu(DOV-CLKH), Output setup time, XSP_DO valid before XSP_CLK high”
120−121
Multichannel Buffered Serial Port (McBSP) Timing section:
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for McBSP table:
Changed the MIN value of parameter #12 “tdis(CKXH-DXHZ), Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high, CLKX ext” from “−2.1” to “2.0” ns
Changed the MIN value of parameter #13 “td(CKXH-DXV), Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid, CLKX ext” from “−2.1 + D1” to
“2.0 + D1” ns
Changed the MIN value of parameter #14 “td(FXH-DXV), Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX int” from “−2.3” to
“−2.3 + D1” ns
Changed the MAX value of parameter #14 “td(FXH-DXV), Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX int” from “5.6” to
“5.6 + D2” ns
Changed the MIN value of parameter #14 “td(FXH-DXV), Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX ext” from “1.9” to
“1.9 + D1” ns
Changed the MAX value of parameter #14 “td(FXH-DXV), Delay time, FSX high to DX valid, FSX ext” from “9” to “9 + D2” ns
Added associated footnote
Figure 51, McBSP Timing:
Added footnote for clarity
4
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PAGE(S)
NO.
ADDITIONS/CHANGES/DELETIONS
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port Timing section:
Switching Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions for GPIO Outputs table:
Changed the MIN value of parameter #3 “tw(GPOH), Pulse duration, GPOx high” from “32P” to “24P − 8” ns
Changed the MIN value of parameter #4 “tw(GPOL), Pulse duration, GPOx low” from “32P” to “24P − 8” ns
Added associated footnote
136
Mechanical Data section:
Deleted the “GLZ and ZLZ (S-PBGA-N532), PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY” mechanical data package diagram; now an
automated merged process
Added the “thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [ZLZ]” table
Added lead-in sentence for the thermal resistance characteristics table(s) and the “merged” mechanical data packages
ADVANCE INFORMATION
134
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
5
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
GLZ and ZLZ BGA packages (bottom view)
GLZ and ZLZ 532-PIN BALL GRID ARRAY (BGA) PACKAGE
( BOTTOM VIEW )†
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
ADVANCE INFORMATION
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
† The ZLZ mechanical package designator represents the version of the GLZ package with lead-free balls. For more detailed information,
see the Mechanical Data section of this document.
6
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
description
With performance of up to 5760 million instructions per second (MIPS) at a clock rate of 720 MHz, the C64x
devices offer cost-effective solutions to high-performance DSP programming challenges. The C64x DSPs
possess the operational flexibility of high-speed controllers and the numerical capability of array processors.
The C64x DSP core processor has 64 general-purpose registers of 32-bit word length and eight highly
independent functional units—two multipliers for a 32-bit result and six arithmetic logic units (ALUs)— with
VelociTI.2 extensions. The VelociTI.2 extensions in the eight functional units include new instructions to
accelerate the performance in key applications and extend the parallelism of the VelociTI architecture. The
C64x can produce four 16-bit multiply-accumulates (MACs) per cycle for a total of 2880 million MACs per
second (MMACS), or eight 8-bit MACs per cycle for a total of 5760 MMACS. The C64x DSP also has
application-specific hardware logic, on-chip memory, and additional on-chip peripherals similar to the other
C6000 DSP platform devices.
The C6416 device has two high-performance embedded coprocessors [Viterbi Decoder Coprocessor (VCP)
and Turbo Decoder Coprocessor (TCP)] that significantly speed up channel-decoding operations on-chip. The
VCP operating at CPU clock divided-by-4 can decode over 600 7.95-Kbps adaptive multi-rate (AMR) [K = 9,
R = 1/3] voice channels. The VCP supports constraint lengths K = 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, rates R = 1/2, 1/3, and 1/4,
and flexible polynomials, while generating hard decisions or soft decisions. The TCP operating at CPU clock
divided-by-2 can decode up to forty-three 384-Kbps or seven 2-Mbps turbo encoded channels (assuming 6
iterations). The TCP implements the max*log-map algorithm and is designed to support all polynomials and
rates required by Third-Generation Partnership Projects (3GPP and 3GPP2), with fully programmable frame
length and turbo interleaver. Decoding parameters such as the number of iterations and stopping criteria are
also programmable. Communications between the VCP/TCP and the CPU are carried out through the EDMA
controller.
The C64x uses a two-level cache-based architecture and has a powerful and diverse set of peripherals. The
Level 1 program cache (L1P) is a 128-Kbit direct mapped cache and the Level 1 data cache (L1D) is a 128-Kbit
2-way set-associative cache. The Level 2 memory/cache (L2) consists of an 8-Mbit memory space that is
shared between program and data space. L2 memory can be configured as mapped memory or combinations
of cache (up to 256K bytes) and mapped memory. The peripheral set includes three multichannel buffered serial
ports (McBSPs); an 8-bit Universal Test and Operations PHY Interface for Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)
Slave [UTOPIA Slave] port (C6415/C6416 only); three 32-bit general-purpose timers; a user-configurable 16-bit
or 32-bit host-port interface (HPI16/HPI32); a peripheral component interconnect (PCI) [C6415/C6416 only];
a general-purpose input/output port (GPIO) with 16 GPIO pins; and two glueless external memory interfaces
(64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB‡), both of which are capable of interfacing to synchronous and asynchronous
memories and peripherals.
The C64x has a complete set of development tools which includes: an advanced C compiler with C64x-specific
enhancements, an assembly optimizer to simplify programming and scheduling, and a Windows debugger
interface for visibility into source code execution.
TMS320C6000, C64x, and C6000 are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
Windows is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
† Throughout the remainder of this document, the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 shall be referred to as TMS320C64x or
C64x where generic, and where specific, their individual full device part numbers will be used or abbreviated as C6414, C6415, or C6416.
‡ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
7
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The TMS320C64x DSPs (including the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 devices) are the
highest-performance fixed-point DSP generation in the TMS320C6000 DSP platform. The TMS320C64x
(C64x†) device is based on the second-generation high-performance, advanced VelociTI
very-long-instruction-word (VLIW) architecture (VelociTI.2) developed by Texas Instruments (TI), making
these DSPs an excellent choice for multichannel and multifunction applications. The C64x is a
code-compatible member of the C6000 DSP platform.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
device characteristics
Table 1 provides an overview of the C6414, C6415, and C6416 DSPs. The table shows significant features of
the C64x devices, including the capacity of on-chip RAM, the peripherals, the CPU frequency, and the package
type with pin count.
Table 1. Characteristics of the C6414, C6415, and C6416 Processors
HARDWARE FEATURES
1
Peripherals
EMIFB (16-bit bus width)
(default clock source = BECLKIN)
1
Not all peripherals pins
are available at the
same time. (For more
details, see the Device
Configuration section.)
EDMA (64 independent channels)
1
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable)
1 (HPI16 or HPI32)
Peripheral performance
is dependent on
chip-level configuration.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
C6414, C6415, AND C6416
EMIFA (64-bit bus width)
(default clock source = AECLKIN)
Decoder Coprocessors
PCI (32-bit) [DeviceID Register value 0xA106]
1 [C6415/C6416 only]
McBSPs (default internal clock source =
CPU/4 clock frequency)
3
UTOPIA (8-bit mode)
1 [C6415/C6416 only]
32-Bit Timers (default internal clock source =
CPU/8 clock frequency)
3
General-Purpose Input/Output 0 (GP0)
16
VCP
1 (C6416 only)
TCP
1 (C6416 only)
Size (Bytes)
On-Chip Memory
1056K
16K-Byte (16KB) L1 Program (L1P) Cache
16KB L1 Data (L1D) Cache
1024KB Unified Mapped RAM/Cache (L2)
Organization
CPU ID + CPU Rev ID
Control Status Register (CSR.[31:16])
Device_ID
Silicon Revision Identification Register
(DEVICE_REV [19:16])
Address: 0x01B0 0200
Frequency
MHz
Cycle Time
Voltage
0x0C01
DEVICE_REV[19:16]
1111
0001
0010 or 0000
0011
Silicon Revision
1.03 or earlier
1.03
1.1
2.0
500, 600, 720
2 ns (C6414-5E0, C6415-5E0, C6416-5E0) and
(C6414A-5E0, C6415A-5E0, C6416A-5E0)
[500-MHz CPU, 100-MHz EMIF]†
1.67 ns (C6414-6E3, C6415-6E3, C6416-6E3) and
(C6414A-6E3, C6415A-6E3, C6416A-6E3)
[600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIFA]†
1.39 ns (C6414-7E3, C6415-7E3, C6416-7E3)
[720-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIFA]†
ns
1.2 V (-5E0)
1.25 V (A-5E0)
1.4 V (-6E3, A-6E3, -7E3)
Core (V)
I/O (V)
3.3 V
PLL Options
CLKIN frequency multiplier
Bypass (x1), x6, x12
BGA Package
23 x 23 mm
Process Technology
µm
0.13 µm
Product Status
Product Preview (PP), Advance Information
(AI), Production Data (PD)
PD, AI‡
532-Pin BGA (GLZ and ZLZ)
† On these C64x devices, the rated EMIF speed affects only the SDRAM interface on EMIFA. For more detailed information, see the EMIF
Device Speed section of this data sheet.
‡ The extended temperature devices for silicon revision 2.0 (C641x A-5E0, C641xA-6E3) are at the advance information (AI) stage of
development. All other devices are at the Production Data (PD) stage of development.
8
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
device compatibility
The C64x generation of devices has a diverse and powerful set of peripherals. The common peripheral set
and pin-compatibility that the C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices offer lead to easier system designs and faster
time to market. Table 2 identifies the peripherals and coprocessors that are available on the C6414, C6415, and
C6416 devices.
The C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices are pin-for-pin compatible, provided the following conditions are met:
All devices are using the same peripherals.
The C6414 is pin-for-pin compatible with the C6415/C6416 when the PCI and UTOPIA peripherals on the
C6415/C6416 are disabled.
The C6415 is pin-for-pin compatible with the C6416 when they are in the same peripheral selection mode.
[For more information on peripheral selection, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.]
The BEA[9:7] pins are properly pulled up/down.
Table 2. Peripherals and Coprocessors Available on the C6414, C6415, and C6416 Devices†‡
C6414
C6415
C6416
EMIFA (64-bit bus width)
PERIPHERALS/COPROCESSORS
√
√
√
EMIFB (16-bit bus width)
√
√
√
EDMA (64 independent channels)
√
√
√
HPI (32- or 16-bit user selectable)
√
√
√
PCI (32-bit) [Specification v2.2]
—
√
√
McBSPs (McBSP0, McBSP1, McBSP2)
√
√
√
UTOPIA (8-bit mode) [Specification v1.0]
—
√
√
Timers (32-bit) [TIMER0, TIMER1, TIMER2]
√
√
√
√
√
√
GPIOs (GP[15:0])
√
† — denotes peripheral/coprocessor is not available on this device.
‡ Not all peripherals pins are available at the same time. (For more details, see the Device Configuration section.)
VCP/TCP Coprocessors
—
—
For more detailed information on the device compatibility and similarities/differences among the C6414, C6415,
and C6416 devices, see the How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and
TMS320C6416 DSPs application report (literature number SPRA718).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
9
ADVANCE INFORMATION
[For more details on the device-specific BEA[9:7] pin configurations, see the Terminal Functions table of
this data sheet.]
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram
C64x Digital Signal Processor
VCP†
L1P Cache
Direct-Mapped
16K Bytes Total
TCP†
SDRAM
64
SBSRAM
16
EMIF A
EMIF B
C64x DSP Core
ZBT SRAM
Instruction Fetch
Timer 2
FIFO
SRAM
Instruction Dispatch
Advanced Instruction Packet
Timer 1
ROM/FLASH
Control
Logic
Instruction Decode
Timer 0
I/O Devices
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Control
Registers
Data Path A
A Register File
A31−A16
A15−A0
McBSP2
.L1
UTOPIA‡
UTOPIA:
Up to 400 Mbps
Master ATMC
or
McBSPs:
Framing Chips:
H.100, MVIP,
SCSA, T1, E1
AC97 Devices,
SPI Devices,
Codecs
Enhanced
DMA
Controller
(64-channel)
.S1
.M1 .D1
Data Path B
Test
B Register File
B31−B16
B15−B0
.D2 .M2 .S2
Advanced
In-Circuit
Emulation
.L2
L2
Memory
1024K
Bytes
Interrupt
Control
McBSP1‡
L1D Cache
2-Way Set-Associative
16K Bytes Total
McBSP0
16
GPIO[8:0]
GPIO[15:9]‡
32
HPI‡
or
PCI‡
Boot Configuration
PLL
(x1, x6, x12)
Power-Down
Logic
Interrupt
Selector
† VCP and TCP decoder coprocessors are applicable to the C6416 device only.
‡ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, the UTOPIA peripheral is muxed with McBSP1, and the PCI peripheral is muxed with the HPI
peripheral and the GPIO[15:9] port. For more details on the multiplexed pins of these peripherals, see the Device Configurations section
of this data sheet.
10
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
CPU (DSP core) description
The CPU fetches VelociTI advanced very-long instruction words (VLIWs) (256 bits wide) to supply up to eight
32-bit instructions to the eight functional units during every clock cycle. The VelociTI VLIW architecture
features controls by which all eight units do not have to be supplied with instructions if they are not ready to
execute. The first bit of every 32-bit instruction determines if the next instruction belongs to the same execute
packet as the previous instruction, or whether it should be executed in the following clock as a part of the next
execute packet. Fetch packets are always 256 bits wide; however, the execute packets can vary in size. The
variable-length execute packets are a key memory-saving feature, distinguishing the C64x CPUs from other
VLIW architectures. The C64x VelociTI.2 extensions add enhancements to the TMS320C62x DSP
VelociTI architecture. These enhancements include:
Register file enhancements
Data path extensions
Quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit extensions with data flow enhancements
Additional functional unit hardware
Increased orthogonality of the instruction set
Additional instructions that reduce code size and increase register flexibility
The CPU features two sets of functional units. Each set contains four units and a register file. One set contains
functional units .L1, .S1, .M1, and .D1; the other set contains units .D2, .M2, .S2, and .L2. The two register files
each contain 32 32-bit registers for a total of 64 general-purpose registers. In addition to supporting the packed
16-bit and 32-/40-bit fixed-point data types found in the C62x VelociTI VLIW architecture, the C64x register
files also support packed 8-bit data and 64-bit fixed-point data types. The two sets of functional units, along with
two register files, compose sides A and B of the CPU [see the functional block and CPU (DSP core) diagram,
and Figure 1]. The four functional units on each side of the CPU can freely share the 32 registers belonging to
that side. Additionally, each side features a “data cross path”—a single data bus connected to all the registers
on the other side, by which the two sets of functional units can access data from the register files on the opposite
side. The C64x CPU pipelines data-cross-path accesses over multiple clock cycles. This allows the same
register to be used as a data-cross-path operand by multiple functional units in the same execute packet. All
functional units in the C64x CPU can access operands via the data cross path. Register access by functional
units on the same side of the CPU as the register file can service all the units in a single clock cycle. On the C64x
CPU, a delay clock is introduced whenever an instruction attempts to read a register via a data cross path if that
register was updated in the previous clock cycle.
In addition to the C62x DSP fixed-point instructions, the C64x DSP includes a comprehensive collection of
quad 8-bit and dual 16-bit instruction set extensions. These VelociTI.2 extensions allow the C64x CPU to
operate directly on packed data to streamline data flow and increase instruction set efficiency.
Another key feature of the C64x CPU is the load/store architecture, where all instructions operate on registers
(as opposed to data in memory). Two sets of data-addressing units (.D1 and .D2) are responsible for all data
transfers between the register files and the memory. The data address driven by the .D units allows data
addresses generated from one register file to be used to load or store data to or from the other register file. The
C64x .D units can load and store bytes (8 bits), half-words (16 bits), and words (32 bits) with a single instruction.
And with the new data path extensions, the C64x .D unit can load and store doublewords (64 bits) with a single
instruction. Furthermore, the non-aligned load and store instructions allow the .D units to access words and
doublewords on any byte boundary. The C64x CPU supports a variety of indirect addressing modes using either
linear- or circular-addressing with 5- or 15-bit offsets. All instructions are conditional, and most can access any
one of the 64 registers. Some registers, however, are singled out to support specific addressing modes or to
hold the condition for conditional instructions (if the condition is not automatically “true”).
TMS320C62x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
11
ADVANCE INFORMATION
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)
The two .M functional units perform all multiplication operations. Each of the C64x .M units can perform two
16 × 16-bit multiplies or four 8 × 8-bit multiplies per clock cycle. The .M unit can also perform 16 × 32-bit multiply
operations, dual 16 × 16-bit multiplies with add/subtract operations, and quad 8 × 8-bit multiplies with add
operations. In addition to standard multiplies, the C64x .M units include bit-count, rotate, Galois field multiplies,
and bidirectional variable shift hardware.
The two .S and .L functional units perform a general set of arithmetic, logical, and branch functions with results
available every clock cycle. The arithmetic and logical functions on the C64x CPU include single 32-bit, dual
16-bit, and quad 8-bit operations.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The processing flow begins when a 256-bit-wide instruction fetch packet is fetched from a program memory.
The 32-bit instructions destined for the individual functional units are “linked” together by “1” bits in the least
significant bit (LSB) position of the instructions. The instructions that are “chained” together for simultaneous
execution (up to eight in total) compose an execute packet. A “0” in the LSB of an instruction breaks the chain,
effectively placing the instructions that follow it in the next execute packet. A C64x DSP device enhancement
now allows execute packets to cross fetch-packet boundaries. In the TMS320C62x/TMS320C67x DSP
devices, if an execute packet crosses the fetch-packet boundary (256 bits wide), the assembler places it in the
next fetch packet, while the remainder of the current fetch packet is padded with NOP instructions. In the C64x
DSP device, the execute boundary restrictions have been removed, thereby, eliminating all of the NOPs added
to pad the fetch packet, and thus, decreasing the overall code size. The number of execute packets within a
fetch packet can vary from one to eight. Execute packets are dispatched to their respective functional units at
the rate of one per clock cycle and the next 256-bit fetch packet is not fetched until all the execute packets from
the current fetch packet have been dispatched. After decoding, the instructions simultaneously drive all active
functional units for a maximum execution rate of eight instructions every clock cycle. While most results are
stored in 32-bit registers, they can be subsequently moved to memory as bytes, half-words, words, or
doublewords. All load and store instructions are byte-, half-word-, word-, or doubleword-addressable.
For more details on the C64x CPU functional units enhancements, see the following documents:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189)
TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395)
How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 DSPs
application report (literature number SPRA718)
TMS320C67x is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
12
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
CPU (DSP core) description (continued)
src1
.L1
src2
dst
long dst
long src
ST1b (Store Data)
ST1a (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
.S1 src1
Data Path A
8
8
Register
File A
(A0−A31)
src2
See Note A
See Note A
long dst
dst
.M1 src1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
src2
LD1b (Load Data)
LD1a (Load Data)
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
DA1 (Address)
.D1
dst
src1
src2
2X
1X
src2
.D2
DA2 (Address)
LD2a (Load Data)
LD2b (Load Data)
src1
dst
32 LSBs
32 MSBs
src2
.M2 src1
dst
See Note A
See Note A
long dst
Register
File B
(B0− B31)
src2
Data Path B
.S2
src1
dst
long dst
long src
ST2a (Store Data)
ST2b (Store Data)
8
8
32 MSBs
32 LSBs
long src
long dst
dst
8
8
.L2 src2
src1
Control Register
File
NOTE A: For the .M functional units, the long dst is 32 MSBs and the dst is 32 LSBs.
Figure 1. TMS320C64x CPU (DSP Core) Data Paths
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
13
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
memory map summary
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 3 shows the memory map address ranges of the TMS320C64x device. Internal memory is always located
at address 0 and can be used as both program and data memory. The external memory address ranges in the
C64x device begin at the hex address locations 0x6000 0000 for EMIFB and 0x8000 0000 for EMIFA.
14
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
memory map summary (continued)
Table 3. TMS320C64x Memory Map Summary
BLOCK SIZE (BYTES)
Internal RAM (L2)
1M
Reserved
23M
External Memory Interface A (EMIFA) Registers
256K
L2 Registers
256K
HPI Registers
256K
McBSP 0 Registers
256K
McBSP 1 Registers
256K
Timer 0 Registers
256K
Timer 1 Registers
256K
Interrupt Selector Registers
256K
EDMA RAM and EDMA Registers
256K
McBSP 2 Registers
256K
EMIFB Registers
256K
Timer 2 Registers
256K
GPIO Registers
256K
UTOPIA Registers (C6415 and C6416 only)†
TCP/VCP Registers (C6416 only)‡
256K
Reserved
256K
PCI Registers (C6415 and C6416 only)†
256K
Reserved
256K
4M – 256K
QDMA Registers
52
Reserved
736M – 52
McBSP 0 Data
64M
McBSP 1 Data
64M
McBSP 2 Data
64M
UTOPIA Queues (C6415 and C6416 only)†
64M
Reserved
256M
TCP/VCP (C6416 only)‡
256M
EMIFB CE0
64M
EMIFB CE1
64M
EMIFB CE2
64M
EMIFB CE3
64M
Reserved
256M
EMIFA CE0
256M
EMIFA CE1
256M
EMIFA CE2
256M
EMIFA CE3
256M
Reserved
1G
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
0000
0010
0180
0184
0188
018C
0190
0194
0198
019C
01A0
01A4
01A8
01AC
01B0
01B4
01B8
01BC
01C0
01C4
0200
0200
3000
3400
3800
3C00
4000
5000
6000
6400
6800
6C00
7000
8000
9000
A000
B000
C000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0034
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
000F
017F
0183
0187
018B
018F
0193
0197
019B
019F
01A3
01A7
01AB
01AF
01B3
01B7
01BB
01BF
01C3
01FF
0200
2FFF
33FF
37FF
3BFF
3FFF
4FFF
5FFF
63FF
67FF
6BFF
6FFF
7FFF
8FFF
9FFF
AFFF
BFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
0033
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
ADVANCE INFORMATION
MEMORY BLOCK DESCRIPTION
† For the C6414 device, these memory address locations are reserved. The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA and PCI peripherals.
‡ Only the C6416 device supports the VCP/TCP Coprocessors. For the C6414 and C6415 devices, these memory address locations are reserved.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
15
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
L2 architecture expanded
Figure 2 shows the detail of the L2 architecture on the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416
devices. For more information on the L2MODE bits, see the cache configuration (CCFG) register bit field
descriptions in the TMS320C64x Two-Level Internal Memory Reference Guide (literature number SPRU610).
L2MODE
000
001
010
L2 Memory
011
Block Base Address
111
768K SRAM
896K SRAM
960K SRAM
992K SRAM
1024K SRAM (All)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
0x0000 0000
768K-Byte SRAM
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
0x000C 0000
256K Cache (4 Way)
128K Cache (4 Way)
64K Cache (4 Way)
32K Cache
(4 Way)
128K-Byte RAM
0x000E 0000
64K-Byte RAM
0x000F 0000
32K-Byte RAM
0x000F 8000
32K-Byte RAM
0x000F FFFF
Figure 2. TMS320C6414/C6415/C6416 L2 Architecture Memory Configuration
16
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions
Table 4 through Table 23 identify the peripheral registers for the C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices by their
register names, acronyms, and hex address or hex address range. For more detailed information on the register
contents, bit names and their descriptions, see the specific peripheral reference guide listed in the
TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190).
Table 4. EMIFA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0180 0000
GBLCTL
EMIFA global control
REGISTER NAME
0180 0004
CECTL1
EMIFA CE1 space control
0180 0008
CECTL0
EMIFA CE0 space control
0180 000C
−
0180 0010
CECTL2
EMIFA CE2 space control
0180 0014
CECTL3
EMIFA CE3 space control
0180 0018
SDCTL
EMIFA SDRAM control
0180 001C
SDTIM
EMIFA SDRAM refresh control
0180 0020
SDEXT
EMIFA SDRAM extension
0180 0024 − 0180 003C
−
0180 0040
PDTCTL
Peripheral device transfer (PDT) control
0180 0044
CESEC1
EMIFA CE1 space secondary control
0180 0048
CESEC0
EMIFA CE0 space secondary control
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
Reserved
0180 004C
−
0180 0050
CESEC2
Reserved
EMIFA CE2 space secondary control
0180 0054
CESEC3
EMIFA CE3 space secondary control
0180 0058 − 0183 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 5. EMIFB Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A8 0000
GBLCTL
EMIFB global control
REGISTER NAME
01A8 0004
CECTL1
EMIFB CE1 space control
01A8 0008
CECTL0
EMIFB CE0 space control
01A8 000C
−
01A8 0010
CECTL2
EMIFB CE2 space control
01A8 0014
CECTL3
EMIFB CE3 space control
01A8 0018
SDCTL
EMIFB SDRAM control
01A8 001C
SDTIM
EMIFB SDRAM refresh control
01A8 0020
SDEXT
EMIFB SDRAM extension
01A8 0024 − 01A8 003C
−
01A8 0040
PDTCTL
Peripheral device transfer (PDT) control
01A8 0044
CESEC1
EMIFB CE1 space secondary control
01A8 0048
CESEC0
EMIFB CE0 space secondary control
01A8 004C
−
01A8 0050
CESEC2
EMIFB CE2 space secondary control
01A8 0054
CESEC3
EMIFB CE3 space secondary control
01A8 0058 − 01AB FFFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
17
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6. L2 Cache Registers
18
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 0000
CCFG
0184 0004 − 0184 0FFC
−
REGISTER NAME
Cache configuration register
Reserved
0184 1000
EDMAWEIGHT
0184 1004 − 0184 1FFC
−
L2 EDMA access control register
0184 2000
L2ALLOC0
L2 allocation register 0
0184 2004
L2ALLOC1
L2 allocation register 1
0184 2008
L2ALLOC2
L2 allocation register 2
L2 allocation register 3
Reserved
0184 200C
L2ALLOC3
0184 2010 − 0184 3FFC
−
0184 4000
L2WBAR
L2 writeback base address register
0184 4004
L2WWC
L2 writeback word count register
0184 4010
L2WIBAR
L2 writeback invalidate base address register
0184 4014
L2WIWC
L2 writeback invalidate word count register
0184 4018
L2IBAR
L2 invalidate base address register
0184 401C
L2IWC
L2 invalidate word count register
0184 4020
L1PIBAR
L1P invalidate base address register
0184 4024
L1PIWC
L1P invalidate word count register
0184 4030
L1DWIBAR
L1D writeback invalidate base address register
0184 4034
L1DWIWC
L1D writeback invalidate word count register
0184 4038 − 0184 4044
−
Reserved
Reserved
0184 4048
L1DIBAR
L1D invalidate base address register
0184 404C
L1DIWC
L1D invalidate word count register
0184 4050 − 0184 4FFC
−
0184 5000
L2WB
0184 5004
L2WBINV
Reserved
L2 writeback all register
L2 writeback invalidate all register
0184 5008 − 0184 7FFC
−
Reserved
0184 8000 − 0184 817C
MAR0 to
MAR95
Reserved
0184 8180
MAR96
Controls EMIFB CE0 range 6000 0000 − 60FF FFFF
0184 8184
MAR97
Controls EMIFB CE0 range 6100 0000 − 61FF FFFF
0184 8188
MAR98
Controls EMIFB CE0 range 6200 0000 − 62FF FFFF
0184 818C
MAR99
Controls EMIFB CE0 range 6300 0000 − 63FF FFFF
0184 8190
MAR100
Controls EMIFB CE1 range 6400 0000 − 64FF FFFF
0184 8194
MAR101
Controls EMIFB CE1 range 6500 0000 − 65FF FFFF
0184 8198
MAR102
Controls EMIFB CE1 range 6600 0000 − 66FF FFFF
0184 819C
MAR103
Controls EMIFB CE1 range 6700 0000 − 67FF FFFF
0184 81A0
MAR104
Controls EMIFB CE2 range 6800 0000 − 68FF FFFF
0184 81A4
MAR105
Controls EMIFB CE2 range 6900 0000 − 69FF FFFF
0184 81A8
MAR106
Controls EMIFB CE2 range 6A00 0000 − 6AFF FFFF
0184 81AC
MAR107
Controls EMIFB CE2 range 6B00 0000 − 6BFF FFFF
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
COMMENTS
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 6. L2 Cache Registers (Continued)
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 81B0
MAR108
Controls EMIFB CE3 range 6C00 0000 − 6CFF FFFF
REGISTER NAME
0184 81B4
MAR109
Controls EMIFB CE3 range 6D00 0000 − 6DFF FFFF
0184 81B8
MAR110
Controls EMIFB CE3 range 6E00 0000 − 6EFF FFFF
0184 81BC
MAR111
Controls EMIFB CE3 range 6F00 0000 − 6FFF FFFF
0184 81C0 − 0184 81FC
MAR112 to
MAR127
0184 8200
MAR128
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8000 0000 − 80FF FFFF
0184 8204
MAR129
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8100 0000 − 81FF FFFF
0184 8208
MAR130
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8200 0000 − 82FF FFFF
0184 820C
MAR131
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8300 0000 − 83FF FFFF
0184 8210
MAR132
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8400 0000 − 84FF FFFF
0184 8214
MAR133
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8500 0000 − 85FF FFFF
COMMENTS
0184 8218
MAR134
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8600 0000 − 86FF FFFF
0184 821C
MAR135
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8700 0000 − 87FF FFFF
0184 8220
MAR136
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8800 0000 − 88FF FFFF
0184 8224
MAR137
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8900 0000 − 89FF FFFF
0184 8228
MAR138
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8A00 0000 − 8AFF FFFF
0184 822C
MAR139
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8B00 0000 − 8BFF FFFF
0184 8230
MAR140
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8C00 0000 − 8CFF FFFF
0184 8234
MAR141
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8D00 0000 − 8DFF FFFF
0184 8238
MAR142
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8E00 0000 − 8EFF FFFF
0184 823C
MAR143
Controls EMIFA CE0 range 8F00 0000 − 8FFF FFFF
0184 8240
MAR144
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9000 0000 − 90FF FFFF
0184 8244
MAR145
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9100 0000 − 91FF FFFF
0184 8248
MAR146
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9200 0000 − 92FF FFFF
0184 824C
MAR147
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9300 0000 − 93FF FFFF
0184 8250
MAR148
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9400 0000 − 94FF FFFF
0184 8254
MAR149
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9500 0000 − 95FF FFFF
0184 8258
MAR150
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9600 0000 − 96FF FFFF
0184 825C
MAR151
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9700 0000 − 97FF FFFF
0184 8260
MAR152
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9800 0000 − 98FF FFFF
0184 8264
MAR153
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9900 0000 − 99FF FFFF
0184 8268
MAR154
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9A00 0000 − 9AFF FFFF
0184 826C
MAR155
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9B00 0000 − 9BFF FFFF
0184 8270
MAR156
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9C00 0000 − 9CFF FFFF
0184 8274
MAR157
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9D00 0000 − 9DFF FFFF
0184 8278
MAR158
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9E00 0000 − 9EFF FFFF
0184 827C
MAR159
Controls EMIFA CE1 range 9F00 0000 − 9FFF FFFF
0184 8280
MAR160
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A000 0000 − A0FF FFFF
0184 8284
MAR161
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A100 0000 − A1FF FFFF
0184 8288
MAR162
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A200 0000 − A2FF FFFF
0184 828C
MAR163
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A300 0000 − A3FF FFFF
0184 8290
MAR164
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A400 0000 − A4FF FFFF
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
19
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 6. L2 Cache Registers (Continued)
20
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0184 8294
MAR165
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A500 0000 − A5FF FFFF
REGISTER NAME
0184 8298
MAR166
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A600 0000 − A6FF FFFF
0184 829C
MAR167
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A700 0000 − A7FF FFFF
0184 82A0
MAR168
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A800 0000 − A8FF FFFF
0184 82A4
MAR169
Controls EMIFA CE2 range A900 0000 − A9FF FFFF
0184 82A8
MAR170
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AA00 0000 − AAFF FFFF
0184 82AC
MAR171
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AB00 0000 − ABFF FFFF
0184 82B0
MAR172
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AC00 0000 − ACFF FFFF
0184 82B4
MAR173
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AD00 0000 − ADFF FFFF
0184 82B8
MAR174
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AE00 0000 − AEFF FFFF
0184 82BC
MAR175
Controls EMIFA CE2 range AF00 0000 − AFFF FFFF
0184 82C0
MAR176
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B000 0000 − B0FF FFFF
0184 82C4
MAR177
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B100 0000 − B1FF FFFF
0184 82C8
MAR178
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B200 0000 − B2FF FFFF
0184 82CC
MAR179
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B300 0000 − B3FF FFFF
0184 82D0
MAR180
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B400 0000 − B4FF FFFF
0184 82D4
MAR181
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B500 0000 − B5FF FFFF
0184 82D8
MAR182
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B600 0000 − B6FF FFFF
0184 82DC
MAR183
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B700 0000 − B7FF FFFF
0184 82E0
MAR184
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B800 0000 − B8FF FFFF
0184 82E4
MAR185
Controls EMIFA CE3 range B900 0000 − B9FF FFFF
0184 82E8
MAR186
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BA00 0000 − BAFF FFFF
0184 82EC
MAR187
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BB00 0000 − BBFF FFFF
0184 82F0
MAR188
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BC00 0000 − BCFF FFFF
0184 82F4
MAR189
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BD00 0000 − BDFF FFFF
0184 82F8
MAR190
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BE00 0000 − BEFF FFFF
0184 82FC
MAR191
Controls EMIFA CE3 range BF00 0000 − BFFF FFFF
0184 8300 − 0184 83FC
MAR192 to
MAR255
Reserved
0184 8400 − 0187 FFFF
−
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
COMMENTS
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 7. EDMA Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01A0 FF9C
EPRH
Event polarity high register
REGISTER NAME
01A0 FFA4
CIPRH
Channel interrupt pending high register
01A0 FFA8
CIERH
Channel interrupt enable high register
01A0 FFAC
CCERH
Channel chain enable high register
01A0 FFB0
ERH
01A0 FFB4
EERH
Event enable high register
01A0 FFB8
ECRH
Event clear high register
01A0 FFBC
ESRH
Event set high register
01A0 FFC0
PQAR0
Priority queue allocation register 0
01A0 FFC4
PQAR1
Priority queue allocation register 1
01A0 FFC8
PQAR2
Priority queue allocation register 2
01A0 FFCC
PQAR3
Priority queue allocation register 3
01A0 FFDC
EPRL
Event polarity low register
01A0 FFE0
PQSR
Priority queue status register
01A0 FFE4
CIPRL
Channel interrupt pending low register
01A0 FFE8
CIERL
Channel interrupt enable low register
01A0 FFEC
CCERL
Channel chain enable low register
01A0 FFF0
ERL
01A0 FFF4
EERL
Event enable low register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Event high register
Event low register
01A0 FFF8
ECRL
Event clear low register
01A0 FFFC
ESRL
Event set low register
01A1 0000 − 01A3 FFFF
–
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
21
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 8. EDMA Parameter RAM†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01A0 0000 − 01A0 0017
−
Parameters for Event 0 (6 words)
01A0 0018 − 01A0 002F
−
Parameters for Event 1 (6 words)
01A0 0030 − 01A0 0047
−
Parameters for Event 2 (6 words)
01A0 0048 − 01A0 005F
−
Parameters for Event 3 (6 words)
01A0 0060 − 01A0 0077
−
Parameters for Event 4 (6 words)
01A0 0078 − 01A0 008F
−
Parameters for Event 5 (6 words)
01A0 0090 − 01A0 00A7
−
Parameters for Event 6 (6 words)
01A0 00A8 − 01A0 00BF
−
Parameters for Event 7 (6 words)
01A0 00C0 − 01A0 00D7
−
Parameters for Event 8 (6 words)
01A0 00D8 − 01A0 00EF
−
Parameters for Event 9 (6 words)
01A0 00F0 − 01A0 00107
−
Parameters for Event 10 (6 words)
01A0 0108 − 01A0 011F
−
Parameters for Event 11 (6 words)
01A0 0120 − 01A0 0137
−
Parameters for Event 12 (6 words)
01A0 0138 − 01A0 014F
−
Parameters for Event 13 (6 words)
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167
−
Parameters for Event 14 (6 words)
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F
−
Parameters for Event 15 (6 words)
01A0 0150 − 01A0 0167
−
Parameters for Event 16 (6 words)
01A0 0168 − 01A0 017F
−
Parameters for Event 17 (6 words)
...
COMMENTS
...
...
...
01A0 05D0 − 01A0 05E7
−
Parameters for Event 62 (6 words)
01A0 05E8 − 01A0 05FF
−
Parameters for Event 63 (6 words)
01A0 0600 − 01A0 0617
−
Reload/link parameters for Event M (6 words)
01A0 0618 − 01A0 062F
−
Reload/link parameters for Event N (6 words)
...
...
01A0 07E0 − 01A0 07F7
−
01A0 07F8 − 01A0 07FF
−
Reload/link parameters for Event Z (6 words)
Scratch pad area (2 words)
† The C6414/C6415/C6416 device has twenty-one parameter sets [six (6) words each] that can be used to reload/link EDMA transfers.
Table 9. Quick DMA (QDMA) and Pseudo Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0200 0000
QOPT
QDMA options parameter register
0200 0004
QSRC
QDMA source address register
0200 0008
QCNT
QDMA frame count register
0200 000C
QDST
QDMA destination address register
0200 0010
QIDX
QDMA index register
0200 0014 − 0200 001C
22
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
0200 0020
QSOPT
QDMA pseudo options register
0200 0024
QSSRC
QDMA pseudo source address register
0200 0028
QSCNT
QDMA pseudo frame count register
0200 002C
QSDST
QDMA pseudo destination address register
0200 0030
QSIDX
QDMA pseudo index register
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 10. Interrupt Selector Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
019C 0000
MUXH
Interrupt multiplexer high
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 10−15 (INT10−INT15)
019C 0004
MUXL
Interrupt multiplexer low
Selects which interrupts drive CPU
interrupts 4−9 (INT04−INT09)
019C 0008
EXTPOL
External interrupt polarity
Sets the polarity of the external
interrupts (EXT_INT4−EXT_INT7)
019C 000C − 019C 01FF
−
Reserved
Table 11. McBSP 0 Registers
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
018C 0000
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 − 0x33FF FFFF
DRR0
McBSP0 data receive register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0004
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Configuration Bus
0x3000 0000 − 0x33FF FFFF
DXR0
McBSP0 data transmit register via Peripheral Bus
018C 0008
SPCR0
018C 000C
RCR0
McBSP0 receive control register
018C 0010
XCR0
McBSP0 transmit control register
018C 0014
SRGR0
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register;
they cannot write to it.
McBSP0 serial port control register
McBSP0 sample rate generator register
018C 0018
MCR0
018C 001C
RCERE00
McBSP0 multichannel control register
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
018C 0020
XCERE00
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
018C 0024
PCR0
018C 0028
RCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
018C 002C
XCERE10
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
018C 0030
RCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
018C 0034
XCERE20
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
McBSP0 pin control register
018C 0038
RCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
018C 003C
XCERE30
McBSP0 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
018C 0040 − 018F FFFF
–
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
23
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 12. McBSP 1 Registers
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
0190 0000
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3400 0000 − 0x37FF FFFF
DRR1
McBSP1 data receive register via Peripheral Bus
0190 0004
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via Configuration Bus
0x3400 0000 − 0x37FF FFFF
DXR1
McBSP1 data transmit register via Peripheral Bus
0190 0008
SPCR1
0190 000C
RCR1
McBSP1 receive control register
0190 0010
XCR1
McBSP1 transmit control register
0190 0014
SRGR1
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register;
they cannot write to it.
McBSP1 serial port control register
McBSP1 sample rate generator register
0190 0018
MCR1
0190 001C
RCERE01
McBSP1 multichannel control register
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
0190 0020
XCERE01
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
0190 0024
PCR1
0190 0028
RCERE11
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
0190 002C
XCERE11
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
0190 0030
RCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
0190 0034
XCERE21
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
McBSP1 pin control register
0190 0038
RCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
0190 003C
XCERE31
McBSP1 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
0190 0040 − 0193 FFFF
–
Reserved
Table 13. McBSP 2 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01A4 0000
DRR2
McBSP2 data receive register via Configuration Bus
0x3800 0000 − 0x3BFF FFFF
DRR2
McBSP2 data receive register via Peripheral Bus
01A4 0004
DXR2
McBSP2 data transmit register via Configuration Bus
0x3800 0000 − 0x3BFF FFFF
DXR2
McBSP2 data transmit register via Peripheral Bus
01A4 0008
SPCR2
01A4 000C
RCR2
McBSP2 receive control register
01A4 0010
XCR2
McBSP2 transmit control register
01A4 0014
SRGR2
24
McBSP2 serial port control register
McBSP2 sample rate generator register
01A4 0018
MCR2
01A4 001C
RCERE02
McBSP2 multichannel control register
McBSP2 enhanced receive channel enable register 0
01A4 0020
XCERE02
McBSP2 enhanced transmit channel enable register 0
01A4 0024
PCR2
01A4 0028
RCERE12
McBSP2 enhanced receive channel enable register 1
01A4 002C
XCERE12
McBSP2 enhanced transmit channel enable register 1
01A4 0030
RCERE22
McBSP2 enhanced receive channel enable register 2
01A4 0034
XCERE22
McBSP2 enhanced transmit channel enable register 2
McBSP2 pin control register
01A4 0038
RCERE32
McBSP2 enhanced receive channel enable register 3
01A4 003C
XCERE32
McBSP2 enhanced transmit channel enable register 3
01A4 0040 − 01A7 FFFF
–
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
COMMENTS
The CPU and EDMA controller
can only read this register;
they cannot write to it.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 14. Timer 0 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
0194 0000
CTL0
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Timer 0 control register
Determines the operating
mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the
function of the TOUT pin.
0194 0004
PRD0
Timer 0 period register
Contains the number of timer
input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the
TSTAT signal frequency.
0194 0008
CNT0
Timer 0 counter register
Contains the current value of
the incrementing counter.
0194 000C − 0197 FFFF
−
Reserved
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
0198 0000
CTL1
Timer 1 control register
Determines the operating
mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the
function of the TOUT pin.
0198 0004
PRD1
Timer 1 period register
Contains the number of timer
input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the
TSTAT signal frequency.
0198 0008
CNT1
Timer 1 counter register
Contains the current value of
the incrementing counter.
0198 000C − 019B FFFF
−
Reserved
Table 16. Timer 2 Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
01AC 0000
ACRONYM
CTL2
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
Timer 2 control register
Determines the operating
mode of the timer, monitors the
timer status, and controls the
function of the TOUT pin.
01AC 0004
PRD2
Timer 2 period register
Contains the number of timer
input clock cycles to count.
This number controls the
TSTAT signal frequency.
01AC 0008
CNT2
Timer 2 counter register
Contains the current value of
the incrementing counter.
01AC 000C − 01AF FFFF
−
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
25
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 15. Timer 1 Registers
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 17. HPI Registers
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
COMMENTS
−
HPID
HPI data register
Host read/write access only
0188 0000
HPIC
HPI control register
HPIC has both Host/CPU
read/write access
0188 0004
HPIA
(HPIAW)†
HPI address register (Write)
0188 0008
HPIA
(HPIAR)†
HPI address register (Read)
0188 000C − 0189 FFFF
−
018A 0000
TRCTL
018A 0004 − 018B FFFF
−
HPIA has both Host/CPU
read/write access
Reserved
HPI transfer request control register
Reserved
† Host access to the HPIA register updates both the HPIAW and HPIAR registers. The CPU can access HPIAW and HPIAR independently.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 18. GPIO Registers
26
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
01B0 0000
GPEN
GPIO enable register
REGISTER NAME
01B0 0004
GPDIR
GPIO direction register
01B0 0008
GPVAL
GPIO value register
01B0 000C
−
01B0 0010
GPDH
GPIO delta high register
01B0 0014
GPHM
GPIO high mask register
01B0 0018
GPDL
GPIO delta low register
01B0 001C
GPLM
GPIO low mask register
01B0 0020
GPGC
GPIO global control register
01B0 0024
GPPOL
GPIO interrupt polarity register
01B0 0028 − 01B0 01FF
−
01B0 0200
DEVICE_REV
01B0 0204 − 01B3 FFFF
−
Reserved
Reserved
Silicon Revision Identification Register
(For more details, see the device characteristics listed in Table 1.)
Reserved
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 19. PCI Peripheral Registers (C6415 and C6416 Only)†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01C0 0000
RSTSRC
01C0 0004
−
01C0 0008
PCIIS
PCI interrupt source register
01C0 000C
PCIIEN
PCI interrupt enable register
01C0 0010
DSPMA
DSP master address register
01C0 0014
PCIMA
PCI master address register
01C0 0018
PCIMC
PCI master control register
01C0 001C
CDSPA
Current DSP address register
01C0 0020
CPCIA
Current PCI address register
01C0 0024
CCNT
Current byte count register
01C0 0028
−
Reserved
01C0 002C − 01C1 FFEF
–
Reserved
0x01C1 FFF0
HSR
0x01C1 FFF4
HDCR
Host-to-DSP control register
DSP page register
DSP Reset source/status register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
Host status register
0x01C1 FFF8
DSPP
0x01C1 FFFC
−
01C2 0000
EEADD
EEPROM address register
01C2 0004
EEDAT
EEPROM data register
01C2 0008
EECTL
EEPROM control register
01C2 000C − 01C2 FFFF
–
01C3 0000
TRCTL
01C3 0004 − 01C3 FFFF
–
Reserved
Reserved
PCI transfer request control register
Reserved
† These PCI registers are not supported on the C6414 device.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
27
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 20. UTOPIA (C6415 and C6416 Only)†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
01B4 0000
UCR
01B4 0004
−
Reserved
01B4 0008
−
Reserved
01B4 000C
UIER
UTOPIA interrupt enable register
01B4 0010
UIPR
UTOPIA interrupt pending register
01B4 0014
CDR
Clock detect register
01B4 0018
EIER
Error interrupt enable register
01B4 001C
EIPR
Error interrupt pending register
01B4 0020 − 01B7 FFFF
−
UTOPIA control register
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
† These UTOPIA registers are not supported on the C6414 device.
Table 21. UTOPIA QUEUES (C6415 and C6416 Only)†
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
3C00 0000
URQ
UTOPIA receive queue
REGISTER NAME
3D00 0000
UXQ
UTOPIA transmit queue
3D00 0004 − 3FFF FFFF
−
Reserved
† These UTOPIA registers are not supported on the C6414 device.
28
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
peripheral register descriptions (continued)
Table 22. VCP Registers (C6416 Only)†
EDMA BUS
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
PERIPHERAL BUS
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
5000 0000
01B8 0000
VCPIC0
VCP input configuration register 0
5000 0004
01B8 0004
VCPIC1
VCP input configuration register 1
5000 0008
01B8 0008
VCPIC2
VCP input configuration register 2
5000 000C
01B8 000C
VCPIC3
VCP input configuration register 3
5000 0010
01B8 0010
VCPIC4
VCP input configuration register 4
5000 0014
01B8 0014
VCPIC5
VCP input configuration register 5
5000 0040
01B8 0024
VCPOUT0
VCP output register 0
5000 0044
01B8 0028
VCPOUT1
VCP output register 1
5000 0080
−
VCPWBM
VCP branch metrics write register
5000 0088
−
VCPRDECS
−
01B8 0018
VCPEXE
VCP execution register
−
01B8 0020
VCPEND
VCP endian register
−
01B8 0040
VCPSTAT0
VCP status register 0
−
01B8 0044
VCPSTAT1
VCP status register 1
−
01B8 0050
VCPERR
REGISTER NAME
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VCP decisions read register
VCP error register
† These VCP registers are supported on the C6416 device only.
Table 23. TCP Registers (C6416 Only)‡
EDMA BUS
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
PERIPHERAL BUS
HEX ADDRESS RANGE
ACRONYM
5800 0000
01BA 0000
TCPIC0
TCP input configuration register 0
5800 0004
01BA 0004
TCPIC1
TCP input configuration register 1
5800 0008
01BA 0008
TCPIC2
TCP input configuration register 2
5800 000C
01BA 000C
TCPIC3
TCP input configuration register 3
5800 0010
01BA 0010
TCPIC4
TCP input configuration register 4
5800 0014
01BA 0014
TCPIC5
TCP input configuration register 5
5800 0018
01BA 0018
TCPIC6
TCP input configuration register 6
5800 001C
01BA 001C
TCPIC7
TCP input configuration register 7
5800 0020
01BA 0020
TCPIC8
TCP input configuration register 8
5800 0024
01BA 0024
TCPIC9
TCP input configuration register 9
5800 0028
01BA 0028
TCPIC10
TCP input configuration register 10
5800 002C
01BA 002C
TCPIC11
TCP input configuration register 11
5800 0030
01BA 0030
TCPOUT
TCP output parameters register
5802 0000
−
TCPSP
5804 0000
−
TCPEXT
5806 0000
−
TCPAP
5808 0000
−
TCPINTER
REGISTER NAME
TCP systematics and parities memory
TCP extrinsics memory
TCP apriori memory
TCP interleaver memory
580A 0000
−
TCPHD
TCP hard decisions memory
−
01BA 0038
TCPEXE
TCP execution register
−
01BA 0040
TCPEND
TCP endian register
−
01BA 0050
TCPERR
TCP error register
−
01BA 0058
TCPSTAT
TCP status register
‡ These TCP registers are supported on the C6416 device only.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
29
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
EDMA channel synchronization events
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The C64x EDMA supports up to 64 EDMA channels which service peripheral devices and external memory.
Table 24 lists the source of C64x EDMA synchronization events associated with each of the programmable
EDMA channels. For the C64x device, the association of an event to a channel is fixed; each of the EDMA
channels has one specific event associated with it. These specific events are captured in the EDMA event
registers (ERL, ERH) even if the events are disabled by the EDMA event enable registers (EERL, EERH). The
priority of each event can be specified independently in the transfer parameters stored in the EDMA parameter
RAM. For more detailed information on the EDMA module and how EDMA events are enabled, captured,
processed, linked, chained, and cleared, etc., see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory Access
(EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).
30
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
EDMA channel synchronization events (continued)
Table 24. TMS320C64x EDMA Channel Synchronization Events†
EDMA
CHANNEL
EVENT NAME
0
DSP_INT
1
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
2
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
3
SD_INTA
4
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GPIO event 4/External interrupt pin 4
5
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GPIO event 5/External interrupt pin 5
6
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GPIO event 6/External interrupt pin 6
7
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GPIO event 7/External interrupt pin 7
8
GPINT0
GPIO event 0
9
GPINT1
GPIO event 1
10
GPINT2
GPIO event 2
11
GPINT3
GPIO event 3
12
XEVT0
McBSP0 transmit event
13
REVT0
McBSP0 receive event
14
XEVT1
McBSP1 transmit event
15
REVT1
McBSP1 receive event
16
–
17
XEVT2
McBSP2 transmit event
18
REVT2
McBSP2 receive event
19
TINT2
Timer 2 interrupt
20
SD_INTB
EMIFB SDRAM timer interrupt
21
–
Reserved, for future expansion
22−27
–
None
28
VCPREVT
29
VCPXEVT
30
TCPREVT
31
TCPXEVT
32
UREVT
EVENT DESCRIPTION
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt (PCI peripheral supported on C6415 and C6416 only)‡
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
None
VCP receive event (C6416 only)§
VCP transmit event (C6416 only)§
TCP receive event (C6416 only)§
TCP transmit event (C6416 only)§
UTOPIA receive event (C6415 and C6416 only)‡
33−39
–
40
UXEVT
None
41−47
–
48
GPINT8
GPIO event 8
49
GPINT9
GPIO event 9
50
GPINT10
GPIO event 10
51
GPINT11
GPIO event 11
52
GPINT12
GPIO event 12
53
GPINT13
GPIO event 13
54
GPINT14
GPIO event 14
55
GPINT15
GPIO event 15
56−63
–
UTOPIA transmit event (C6415 and C6416 only)‡
None
None
† In addition to the events shown in this table, each of the 64 channels can also be synchronized with the transfer completion or alternate transfer
completion events. For more detailed information on EDMA event-transfer chaining, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Enhanced Direct Memory
Access (EDMA) Controller Reference Guide (literature number SPRU234).
‡ The PCI and UTOPIA peripherals are not supported on the C6414 device; therefore, these EDMA synchronization events are reserved.
§ The VCP/TCP EDMA synchronization events are supported on the C6416 only. For the C6414 and C6415 devices, these events are reserved.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
31
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
interrupt sources and interrupt selector
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The C64x DSP core supports 16 prioritized interrupts, which are listed in Table 25. The highest-priority interrupt
is INT_00 (dedicated to RESET) while the lowest-priority interrupt is INT_15. The first four interrupts
(INT_00−INT_03) are non-maskable and fixed. The remaining interrupts (INT_04−INT_15) are maskable and
default to the interrupt source specified in Table 25. The interrupt source for interrupts 4−15 can be programmed
by modifying the selector value (binary value) in the corresponding fields of the Interrupt Selector Control
registers: MUXH (address 0x019C0000) and MUXL (address 0x019C0004).
32
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
interrupt sources and interrupt selector (continued)
Table 25. C64x DSP Interrupts
INTERRUPT
SELECTOR
CONTROL
REGISTER
SELECTOR
VALUE
(BINARY)
INTERRUPT
EVENT
INT_00†
INT_01†
−
−
RESET
−
−
NMI
INT_02†
INT_03†
−
−
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
−
−
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
INT_04‡
INT_05‡
MUXL[4:0]
00100
GPINT4/EXT_INT4
GPIO interrupt 4/External interrupt pin 4
MUXL[9:5]
00101
GPINT5/EXT_INT5
GPIO interrupt 5/External interrupt pin 5
INT_06‡
INT_07‡
MUXL[14:10]
00110
GPINT6/EXT_INT6
GPIO interrupt 6/External interrupt pin 6
MUXL[20:16]
00111
GPINT7/EXT_INT7
GPIO interrupt 7/External interrupt pin 7
INT_08‡
INT_09‡
MUXL[25:21]
01000
EDMA_INT
EDMA channel (0 through 63) interrupt
MUXL[30:26]
01001
EMU_DTDMA
INT_10‡
MUXH[4:0]
00011
SD_INTA
INT_11‡
MUXH[9:5]
01010
EMU_RTDXRX
EMU real-time data exchange (RTDX)
receive
INT_12‡
MUXH[14:10]
01011
EMU_RTDXTX
EMU RTDX transmit
INT_13‡
MUXH[20:16]
00000
DSP_INT
INT_14‡
INT_15‡
MUXH[25:21]
00001
TINT0
Timer 0 interrupt
MUXH[30:26]
00010
TINT1
Timer 1 interrupt
−
−
01100
XINT0
McBSP0 transmit interrupt
−
−
01101
RINT0
McBSP0 receive interrupt
−
−
01110
XINT1
McBSP1 transmit interrupt
−
−
01111
RINT1
McBSP1 receive interrupt
−
−
10000
GPINT0
−
−
10001
XINT2
McBSP2 transmit interrupt
−
−
10010
RINT2
McBSP2 receive interrupt
−
−
10011
TINT2
Timer 2 interrupt
−
−
10100
SD_INTB
EMIFB SDRAM timer interrupt
−
−
10101
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
−
−
10110
Reserved
Reserved. Do not use.
−
−
10111
UINT
−
−
11000 − 11101
Reserved
−
−
11110
VCPINT
VCP interrupt (C6416 only)
−
−
11111
TCPINT
TCP interrupt (C6416 only)
INTERRUPT SOURCE
ADVANCE INFORMATION
CPU
INTERRUPT
NUMBER
EMU DTDMA
EMIFA SDRAM timer interrupt
HPI/PCI-to-DSP interrupt
(PCI supported on C6415 and C6416 only)
GPIO interrupt 0
UTOPIA interrupt (C6415/C6416 only)
Reserved. Do not use.
† Interrupts INT_00 through INT_03 are non-maskable and fixed.
‡ Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15 are programmable by modifying the binary selector values in the Interrupt Selector Control
registers fields. Table 25 shows the default interrupt sources for Interrupts INT_04 through INT_15. For more detailed
information on interrupt sources and selection, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Interrupt Selector Reference Guide (literature
number SPRU646).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
33
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
signal groups description
CLKIN
CLKOUT4/GP1†
CLKOUT6/GP2†
CLKMODE1
CLKMODE0
PLLV
ADVANCE INFORMATION
TMS
TDO
TDI
TCK
TRST
EMU0
EMU1
EMU2
EMU3
EMU4
EMU5
EMU6
EMU7
EMU8
EMU9
EMU10
EMU11
Reset and
Interrupts
Clock/PLL
Reserved
IEEE Standard
1149.1
(JTAG)
Emulation
RESET
NMI
GP7/EXT_INT7‡
GP6/EXT_INT6‡
GP5/EXT_INT5‡
GP4/EXT_INT4‡
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
RSV
•
•
•
RSV
RSV
RSV
Peripheral
Control/Status
PCI_EN
MCBSP2_EN
Control/Status
GP15/PRST§
GP14/PCLK§
GP13/PINTA§
GP12/PGNT§
GP11/PREQ§
GP10/PCBE3§
GP9/PIDSEL§
CLKS2/GP8†
GPIO
GP7/EXT_INT7‡
GP6/EXT_INT6‡
GP5/EXT_INT5‡
GP4/EXT_INT4‡
GP3
CLKOUT6/GP2†
CLKOUT4/GP1†
GP0
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Port
† These pins are muxed with the GPIO port pins and by default these signals function as clocks (CLKOUT4 or CLKOUT6) or McBSP2
clock source (CLKS2). To use these muxed pins as GPIO signals, the appropriate GPIO register bits (GPxEN and GPxDIR) must be
properly enabled and configured. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
‡ These pins are GPIO pins that can also function as external interrupt sources (EXT_INT[7:4]). Default after reset is EXT_INTx or
GPIO as input-only.
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these GPIO pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral pins. By default, these signals are set up to
no function with both the GPIO and PCI pin functions disabled. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet. For the C6414 device, the GPIO peripheral pins are not muxed; the C6414 device does not support the
PCI peripheral.
Figure 3. CPU and Peripheral Signals
34
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
signal groups description (continued)
64
Data
AECLKIN
ACE3
ACE2
Memory Map
Space Select
ACE1
ACE0
20
AEA[22:3]
External
Memory I/F
Control
Address
ABE7
ABE6
ABE5
ABE4
Byte Enables
ABE3
ABE2
ABE1
ABE0
Bus
Arbitration
AECLKOUT1
AECLKOUT2
ASDCKE
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE
AARDY
ASOE3
APDT
AHOLD
AHOLDA
ABUSREQ
EMIFA (64-bit)†
16
Data
BED[15:0]
BECLKIN
BECLKOUT1
BECLKOUT2
BCE3
BCE2
BCE1
BCE0
Memory Map
Space Select
External
Memory I/F
Control
20
BEA[20:1]
BBE1
BBE0
BARE/BSDCAS/BSADS/BSRE
BAOE/BSDRAS/BSOE
BAWE/BSDWE/BSWE
BARDY
BSOE3
BPDT
Address
Byte Enables
Bus
Arbitration
BHOLD
BHOLDA
BBUSREQ
EMIFB (16-bit)†
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is
an EMIFA signal whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document,
in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
35
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AED[63:0]
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
signal groups description (continued)
32
HPI†
(Host-Port Interface)
Data
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
Register Select
Control
Half-Word
Select
HHWIL/PTRDY
(HPI16 ONLY)
HAS/PPAR
HR/W/PCBE2
HCS/PPERR
HDS1/PSERR
HDS2/PCBE1
HRDY/PIRDY
HINT/PFRAME
32
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]
GP10/PCBE3
HR/W/PCBE2
HDS2/PCBE1
PCBE0§
GP12/PGNT
Data/Address
Clock
Command
Byte Enable
Control
Arbitration
Error
GP11/PREQ
Serial
EEPROM
PCI Interface‡
(C6415 and C6416 Only)
GP14/PCLK
GP9/PIDSEL
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
HINT/PFRAME
GP13/PINTA
HAS/PPAR
GP15/PRST
HRDY/PIRDY
HCNTL0/PSTOP
HHWIL/PTRDY
HDS1/PSERR
HCS/PPERR
DX2/XSP_DO
XSP_CS§
CLKX2/XSP_CLK
DR2/XSP_DI
† For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these HPI pins are muxed with the PCI peripheral. By default, these signals function as HPI. For
more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet. For the C6414 device, these HPI pins are
not muxed; the C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral.
‡ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these PCI pins (excluding PCBE0 and XSP_CS) are muxed with the HPI, McBSP2, or GPIO
peripherals. By default, these signals function as HPI, McBSP2, and no function, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins,
see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet. For the C6414 device, the HPI, McBSP2, and GPIO peripheral pins are not
muxed; the C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral.
§ For the C6414 device, these pins are “Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground).”
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
36
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
signal groups description (continued)
McBSP1
McBSP0
CLKX1/URADDR4†
FSX1/UXADDR3†
DX1/UXADDR4†
Transmit
Transmit
CLKR1/URADDR2†
FSR1/UXADDR2†
DR1/UXADDR1†
Receive
Receive
CLKS1/URADDR3†
Clock
CLKX0
FSX0
DX0
CLKR0
FSR0
DR0
Clock
CLKS0
Transmit
CLKR2
FSR2
DR2/XSP_DI†
Receive
CLKS2/GP8‡
Clock
ADVANCE INFORMATION
McBSP2
CLKX2/XSP_CLK†
FSX2
DX2/XSP_DO†
McBSPs
(Multichannel Buffered
Serial Ports)
† For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these McBSP2 and McBSP1 pins are muxed with the PCI and UTOPIA peripherals, respectively.
By default, these signals function as McBSP2 and McBSP1, respectively. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device
Configurations section of this data sheet.
For the C6414 device, these McBSP2 and McBSP1 peripheral pins are not muxed; the C6414 device does not support PCI and UTOPIA
peripherals.
‡ The McBSP2 clock source pin (CLKS2, default) is muxed with the GP8 pin. To use this muxed pin as the GP8 signal, the appropriate
GPIO register bits (GP8EN and GP8DIR) must be properly enabled and configured. For more details, see the Device Configurations
section of this data sheet.
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
37
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
signal groups description (continued)
UTOPIA (SLAVE) [C6415 and C6416 Only]
URDATA7
URDATA6
URDATA5
URDATA4
URDATA3
URDATA2
Receive
Transmit
URDATA1
URDATA0
ADVANCE INFORMATION
URENB
CLKX1/URADDR4†
CLKS1/URADDR3†
CLKR1/URADDR2†
URADDR1
URADDR0
URCLAV
URSOC
UXDATA7
UXDATA6
UXDATA5
UXDATA4
UXDATA3
UXDATA2
UXDATA1
UXDATA0
Control/Status
Control/Status
UXENB
DX1/UXADDR4†
FSX1/UXADDR3†
FSR1/UXADDR2†
DR1/UXADDR1†
UXADDR0
UXCLAV
UXSOC
URCLK
Clock
TOUT1
TINP1
Timer 1
TOUT2
TINP2
Timer 2
Clock
Timer 0
UXCLK
TOUT0
TINP0
Timers
† For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these UTOPIA pins are muxed with the McBSP1 peripheral. By default, these signals function as
McBSP1. For more details on these muxed pins, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
For the C6414 device, these McBSP1 peripheral pins are not muxed; the C6414 does not support the UTOPIA peripheral.
Figure 4. Peripheral Signals (Continued)
38
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS
The C6414, C6415, and C6416 peripheral selections and other device configurations are determined by
external pullup/pulldown resistors on the following pins (all of which are latched during device reset):
peripherals selection (C6415 and C6416 devices)
−
BEA11 (UTOPIA_EN)
−
PCI_EN (for C6415 or C6416, see Table 27 footnotes)
−
MCBSP2_EN (for C6415 or C6416, see Table 27 footnotes)
The C6414 device does not support the PCI and UTOPIA peripherals; for proper operation of the C6414
device, do not oppose the internal pulldowns (IPDs) on the BEA11, PCI_EN, and MCBSP2_EN pins. (For
IPUs/IPDs on pins, see the Terminal Functions table of this data sheet.)
−
BEA[20:13, 7]
−
HD5
peripherals selection
Some C6415/C6416 peripherals share the same pins (internally muxed) and are mutually exclusive (i.e., HPI,
general-purpose input/output pins GP[15:9], PCI and its internal EEPROM, McBSP1, McBSP2, and UTOPIA).
The VCP/TCP coprocessors (C6416 only) and other C64x peripherals (i.e., the Timers, McBSP0, and the
GP[8:0] pins), are always available.
UTOPIA and McBSP1 peripherals
The UTOPIA_EN pin (BEA11) is latched at reset. For C6415 and C6416 devices, this pin selects whether
the UTOPIA peripheral or McBSP1 peripheral is functionally enabled (see Table 26).
The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA peripheral; for proper device operation, do not oppose the
internal pulldown (IPD) on the BEA11 pin.
Table 26. UTOPIA_EN Peripheral Selection (McBSP1 and UTOPIA) (C6415/C6416 Only)
PERIPHERAL SELECTION
UTOPIA_EN
(BEA11) Pin [D16]
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
UTOPIA
√
0
1
√
DESCRIPTION
McBSP1
McBSP1 is enabled and UTOPIA is disabled [default].
This means all multiplexed McBSP1/UTOPIA pins function as McBSP1
and all other standalone UTOPIA pins are tied-off (Hi-Z).
UTOPIA is enabled and McBSP1 is disabled.
This means all multiplexed McBSP1/UTOPIA pins now function as
UTOPIA and all other standalone McBSP1 pins are tied-off (Hi-Z).
HPI, GP[15:9], PCI, EEPROM (internal to PCI), and McBSP2 peripherals
The PCI_EN and MCBSP2_EN pins are latched at reset. They determine specific peripheral selection for
the C6415 and C6416 devices, summarized in Table 27.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral; for proper device operation, do not oppose the
internal pulldowns (IPDs) on the PCI_EN and MCBSP2_EN pins.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
39
ADVANCE INFORMATION
other device configurations (C64x)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 27. PCI_EN and MCBSP2_EN Peripheral Selection (HPI, GP[15:9], PCI, and McBSP2)
PERIPHERAL SELECTION†
PERIPHERALS SELECTED
PCI_EN
Pin [AA4]
MCBSP2_EN
Pin [AF3]
HPI
GP[15:9]
0
0
√
√
√
0
1
√
√
1
0
√
‡
PCI
√
EEPROM
(Internal to PCI)
√
McBSP2
√
† The PCI_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.
The MCBSP2_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user can switch values throughout device operation.
‡ The only time McBSP2 is disabled is when both PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN = 0. This configuration enables, at reset, the auto-initialization
of the PCI peripheral through the PCI internal EEPROM [provided the PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization pin (BEA13) is pulled up
(EEAI = 1)]. The user can then enable the McBSP2 peripheral (disabling EEPROM) by dynamically changing MCBSP2_EN to a “1” after the
device is initialized (out of reset).
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
√
1
−
If the PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the HPI peripheral is enabled and GP[15:9] pins can be programmed
as GPIO, provided the GPxEN and GPxDIR bits are properly configured.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as HPI and all standalone PCI pins (PCBE0 and
XSP_CS) are tied-off (Hi-Z). Also, the multiplexed GPIO/PCI pins can be used as GPIO with the
proper software configuration of the GPIO enable and direction registers (for more details, see
Table 29).
−
If the PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), the HPI peripheral is disabled.
This means all multiplexed HPI/PCI pins function as PCI. Also, the multiplexed GPIO/PCI pins function
as PCI pins (for more details, see Table 29).
−
The MCBSP2_EN pin, in combination with the PCI_EN pin, controls the selection of the McBSP2
peripheral and the PCI internal EEPROM (for more details, see Table 27 and its footnotes).
other device configurations
Table 28 describes the C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices configuration pins, which are set up via external
pullup/pulldown resistors through the specified EMIFB address bus pins (BEA[20:13, 11, 9:7]) and the HD5 pin.
For more details on these device configuration pins, see the Terminal Functions table and the Debugging
Considerations section.
40
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 28. Device Configuration Pins (BEA[20:13, 9:7], HD5, and BEA11)
NO.
BEA20
E16
BEA[19:18]
BEA[17:16]
BEA[15:14]
BEA13
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Device Endian mode (LEND)
0 – System operates in Big Endian mode
1 − System operates in Little Endian mode (default)
[D18,
C18]
Bootmode [1:0]
00 – No boot
01 − HPI boot
10 − EMIFB 8-bit ROM boot with default timings (default mode)
11 − Reserved
[B18,
A18]
EMIFA input clock select
Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – AECLKIN (default mode)
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 − Reserved
[D17,
C17]
EMIFB input clock select
Clock mode select for EMIFB (BECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – BECLKIN (default mode)
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 − Reserved
B17
PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI) [C6415 and C6416 devices only]
[The C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral; for proper device operation, do not oppose the
internal pulldown (IPD) on the BEA13 pin.]
PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM
0 − PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled; the PCI peripheral uses the specified
PCI default values (default).
1 − PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled; the PCI peripheral is configured
through EEPROM provided the PCI peripheral pin is enabled (PCI_EN = 1) and the
McBSP2 peripheral pin is disabled (MCBSP2_EN = 0).
Note: If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
For more information on the PCI EEPROM default values, see the TMS320C6000 DSP Peripheral
Component Interconnect (PCI) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU581).
UTOPIA Enable (UTOPIA_EN) [C6415 and C6416 devices only]
[The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA peripheral; for proper device operation, do not
oppose the internal pulldown (IPD) on the BEA11 pin.]
UTOPIA peripheral enable (functional)
BEA11
D16
0 − UTOPIA peripheral disabled (McBSP1 functions are enabled). [default]
This means all multiplexed McBSP1/UTOPIA pins function as McBSP1 and all other
standalone UTOPIA pins are tied-off (Hi-Z).
1 − UTOPIA peripheral enabled (McBSP1 functions are disabled).
This means all multiplexed McBSP1/UTOPIA pins now function as UTOPIA and all other
standalone McBSP1 pins are tied-off (Hi-Z).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
41
ADVANCE INFORMATION
CONFIGURATION
PIN
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 28. Device Configuration Pins (BEA[20:13, 9:7], HD5, and BEA11) (Continued)
CONFIGURATION
PIN
NO.
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
C6414 Devices
BEA7
BEA8
BEA9
D15
A16
B16
C6415 Devices
Do not oppose internal pulldown (IPD) Pullup†
Do not oppose IPD
Do not oppose IPD
Do not oppose IPD
Do not oppose IPD
C6416 Devices
Do not oppose IPD
Pullup†
Pullup†
†For proper device operation, this pin must be externally pulled up with a 1-kΩ resistor.
Y1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HD5
HPI peripheral bus width (HPI_WIDTH)
0 − HPI operates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are
reserved pins in the Hi-Z state.)
1 − HPI operates as an HPI32.
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)
42
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
multiplexed pins
Multiplexed pins are pins that are shared by more than one peripheral and are internally multiplexed. Some of
these pins are configured by software, and the others are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors only
at reset. Those muxed pins that are configured by software can be programmed to switch functionalities at any
time. Those muxed pins that are configured by external pullup/pulldown resistors are mutually exclusive; only
one peripheral has primary control of the function of these pins after reset. Table 29 identifies the multiplexed
pins on the C6414, C6415, and C6416 devices; shows the default (primary) function and the default settings
after reset; and describes the pins, registers, etc. necessary to configure specific multiplexed functions.
It is recommended that external connections be provided to device configuration pins, including
CLKMODE[1:0], BEA[20:13, 11, 9:7], HD5/AD5, PCI_EN, and MCBSP2_EN. Although internal pullup/pulldown
resistors exist on these pins (except for HD5/AD5), providing external connectivity adds convenience to the user
in debugging and flexibility in switching operating modes.
Internal pullup/pulldown resistors also exist on the non-configuration pins on the BEA bus (BEA[12, 10, 6:1]).
Do not oppose the internal pullup/pulldown resistors on these non-configuration pins with external
pullup/pulldown resistors. If an external controller provides signals to these non-configuration pins, these
signals must be driven to the default state of the pins at reset, or not be driven at all.
For the internal pullup/pulldown resistors on the C6414, C6415, and C6416 device pins, see the terminal
functions table.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
43
ADVANCE INFORMATION
debugging considerations
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS (CONTINUED)
Table 29. C6414, C6415, and C6416 Device Multiplexed Pins†
MULTIPLEXED PINS
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NAME
NO.
DEFAULT FUNCTION
DEFAULT SETTING
CLKOUT4/GP1‡
AE6
CLKOUT4
GP1EN = 0 (disabled)
CLKOUT6/GP2‡
AD6
CLKOUT6
GP2EN = 0 (disabled)
CLKS2/GP8‡
AE4
CLKS2
GP8EN = 0 (disabled)
GP9/PIDSEL
M3
GP10/PCBE3
L2
GP11/PREQ
F1
GP12/PGNT
J3
GP13/PINTA
G4
GP14/PCLK
F2
GP15/PRST
None
AB11
DX1
FSX1/UXADDR3
AB13
FSX1
FSR1/UXADDR2
AC9
FSR1
DR1/UXADDR1
AF11
DR1
CLKX1/URADDR4
AB12
CLKX1
CLKS1/URADDR3
AC8
CLKS1
CLKR1/URADDR2
AC10
CLKR1
CLKX2/XSP_CLK
AC2
CLKX2
DR2/XSP_DI
AB3
DR2
DX2/XSP_DO
AA2
§
DX2
HAS/PPAR
T3
HAS
HCNTL1/PDEVSEL
R1
HCNTL1
HCNTL0/PSTOP
T4
HCNTL0
HDS1/PSERR
T1
HDS1
HDS2/PCBE1
T2
HDS2
HR/W/PCBE2
P1
HR/W
HHWIL/PTRDY
R3
HHWIL (HPI16 only)
HINT/PFRAME
R4
HINT
HCS/PPERR
R2
HCS
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0]
These pins are software-configurable.
To use these pins as GPIO pins, the
GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable
Register and the GPxDIR bits in the
GPIO Direction Register must be
properly configured.
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output
GPxEN = 0 (disabled)
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)†
To use GP[15:9] as GPIO pins, the PCI
needs to be disabled (PCI_EN = 0), the
GPxEN bits in the GPIO Enable
Register and the GPxDIR bits in the
GPIO Direction Register must be
properly configured.
GPxEN = 1: GPx pin enabled
GPxDIR = 0: GPx pin is an input
GPxDIR = 1: GPx pin is an output
UTOPIA_EN (BEA11) = 0
(disabled)†
By default, McBSP1 is enabled upon
reset (UTOPIA is disabled).
To enable the UTOPIA peripheral, an
external pullup resistor (1 kΩ) must be
provided on the BEA11 pin (setting
UTOPIA_EN = 1 at reset).
PCI_EN = 0 (disabled)†
By default, HPI is enabled upon reset
(PCI is disabled).
To enable the PCI peripheral an external
pullup resistor (1 kkΩ)) must be provided
on the PCI_EN pin (setting PCI_EN = 1
at reset).
G3
DX1/UXADDR4
DESCRIPTION
HD[31:0]
HRDY/PIRDY
P4
HRDY
† For the C6415 and C6416 devices, all other standalone UTOPIA and PCI pins are tied-off internally (pins in Hi-Z) when the peripheral is disabled
[UTOPIA_EN (BEA11) = 0 or PCI_EN = 0].
‡ The C6414 device does not support the PCI and UTOPIA peripherals. These are the only multiplexed pins on the C6414 device, all other pins
are standalone peripheral functions and are not muxed.
§ For the HD[31:0]/AD[31:0] multiplexed pins pin numbers, see the Terminal Functions table.
44
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions
SIGNAL
NAME
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
H4
I
IPD
Clock Input. This clock is the input to the on-chip PLL.
CLKOUT4/GP1§
AE6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a
GPIO 1 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT6/GP2§
AD6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a
GPIO 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKMODE1
G1
I
IPD
CLKMODE0
H2
I
IPD
PLLV¶
J6
A#
NO.
DESCRIPTION
CLOCK/PLL CONFIGURATION
CLKIN
Clock mode select
• Selects whether the CPU clock frequency = input clock frequency x1 (Bypass), x6, or x12.
For more details on the CLKMODE pins and the PLL multiply factors, see the Clock PLL
section of this data sheet.
PLL voltage supply
TMS
AB16
I
IPU
JTAG test-port mode select
TDO
AE19
O/Z
IPU
JTAG test-port data out
TDI
AF18
I
IPU
JTAG test-port data in
TCK
AF16
I
IPU
JTAG test-port clock
TRST
AB15
I
IPD
JTAG test-port reset. For IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility, see the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet.
EMU11
AC18
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 11. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU10
AD18
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 10. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU9
AE18
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 9. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU8
AC17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 8. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU7
AF17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 7. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU6
AD17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 6. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU5
AE17
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 5. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU4
AC16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 4. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU3
AD16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 3. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU2
AE16
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation pin 2. Reserved for future use, leave unconnected.
EMU1
EMU0
AC15
AF15
I/O/Z
IPU
Emulation [1:0] pins
• Select the device functional mode of operation
Operation
EMU[1:0]
00
Boundary Scan/Normal Mode (see Note)
01
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Emulation/Normal Mode [default] (see the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
Compatibility Statement section of this data sheet)
Normal mode refers to the DSPs normal operational mode, when the DSP is free running. The
DSP can be placed in normal operational mode when the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for
either Boundary Scan or Emulation.
Note: When the EMU[1:0] pins are configured for Boundary Scan mode, the internal pulldown
(IPD) on the TRST signal must not be opposed in order to operate in Normal mode.
For the Boundary Scan mode pulldown EMU[1:0] pins with a dedicated 1-kΩ resister.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
¶ PLLV is not part of external voltage supply. See the Clock PLL section for information on how to connect this pin.
# A = Analog signal (PLL Filter)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
45
ADVANCE INFORMATION
JTAG EMULATION
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
RESETS, INTERRUPTS, AND GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUTS
RESET
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NMI
AC7
I
B4
I
Device reset
IPD
Nonmaskable interrupt, edge-driven (rising edge)
IPU
GP7/EXT_INT7
AF4
GP6/EXT_INT6
AD5
GP5/EXT_INT5
AE5
GP4/EXT_INT4
GP15/PRST§
AF5
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) pins (I/O/Z) or external interrupts (input only). The
default after reset setting is GPIO enabled as input-only.
• When these pins function as External Interrupts [by selecting the corresponding interrupt
enable register bit (IER.[7:4])], they are edge-driven and the polarity can be
independently selected via the External Interrupt Polarity Register bits (EXTPOL.[3:0]).
G3
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at default.
I/O/Z
GP14/PCLK§
GP13/PINTA§
F2
GPIO 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.
G4
GPIO 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.
GP12/PGNT§
GP11/PREQ§
J3
GPIO 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.
F1
GPIO 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.
GP10/PCBE3§
GP9/PIDSEL§
M3
GP3
AC6
IPD
GPIO 3 pin (I/O/Z). The default after reset setting is GPIO 3 enabled as input-only.
GP0
AF6
IPD
GPIO 0 pin.
The general-purpose I/O 0 pin (GPIO 0) (I/O/Z) can be programmed as GPIO 0 (input only)
[default] or as GPIO 0 (output only) pin or output as a general-purpose interrupt (GP0INT)
signal (output only).
CLKS2/GP8§¶
AE4
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 external clock source (CLKS2) [input only] [default] or this pin can be programmed as a GPIO 8 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT6/GP2§¶
AD6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/6 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a
GPIO 2 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKOUT4/GP1§¶
AE6
I/O/Z
IPD
Clock output at 1/4 of the device speed (O/Z) [default] or this pin can be programmed as a
GPIO 1 pin (I/O/Z).
L2
GPIO 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.
I/O/Z
GPIO 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) [C64x] or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) [C6415 or C6416 devices only]
PCI_EN
AA4
I
IPD
PCI enable pin. This pin controls the selection (enable/disable) of the HPI and GP[15:9], or
PCI peripherals (for the C6415 and C6416 devices). This pin works in conjunction with the
MCBSP2_EN pin to enable/disable other peripherals (for more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet).
The C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral; for proper device operation, do not
oppose the internal pulldown (IPD) on this pin.
HINT/PFRAME§
R4
I/O/Z
Host interrupt from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI frame (I/O/Z)
HCNTL1/
PDEVSEL§
R1
I/O/Z
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI device
select (I/O/Z).
HCNTL0/
PSTOP§
T4
I/O/Z
Host control − selects between control, address, or data registers (I) [default] or PCI stop
(I/O/Z)
HHWIL/PTRDY§
R3
I/O/Z
Host half-word select − first or second half-word (not necessarily high or low order)
[For HPI16 bus width selection only] (I) [default] or PCI target ready (I/O/Z)
HR/W/PCBE2§
P1
I/O/Z
Host read or write select (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 2 (I/O/Z)
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins are standalone peripheral functions
for this device.
¶ For the C6414 device, only these pins are multiplexed pins.
46
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) [C64x] or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) [C6415 or C6416 devices only]
(CONTINUED)
HAS/PPAR§
T3
I/O/Z
Host address strobe (I) [default] or PCI parity (I/O/Z)
HCS/PPERR§
HDS1/PSERR§
R2
I/O/Z
Host chip select (I) [default] or PCI parity error (I/O/Z)
T1
I/O/Z
Host data strobe 1 (I) [default] or PCI system error (I/O/Z)
HDS2/PCBE1§
HRDY/PIRDY§
T2
I/O/Z
Host data strobe 2 (I) [default] or PCI command/byte enable 1 (I/O/Z)
P4
I/O/Z
Host ready from DSP to host (O) [default] or PCI initiator ready (I/O/Z).
HD31/AD31§
HD30/AD30§
K3
HD29/AD29§
HD28/AD28§
K4
J2
HD27/AD27§
HD26/AD26§
K2
HD25/AD25§
HD24/AD24§
K1
HD23/AD23§
HD22/AD22§
L3
L4
L1
Host-port data (I/O/Z) [default] (C64x) or PCI data-address bus (I/O/Z) [C6415 and C6416]
M4
HD21/AD21§
HD20/AD20§
M2
HD19/AD19§
HD18/AD18§
M1
HD17/AD17§
HD16/AD16§
N1
HD15/AD15§
HD14/AD14§
U4
HD13/AD13§
HD12/AD12§
U3
HD11/AD11§
HD10/AD10§
V4
HD9/AD9§
HD8/AD8§
V3
HD7/AD7§
HD6/AD6§
W2
HD5/AD5§
HD4/AD4§
Y1
HD3/AD3§
HD2/AD2§
Y2
HD1/AD1§
HD0/AD0§
AA1
As HPI data bus (PCI_EN pin = 0)
• Used for transfer of data, address, and control
• Host-Port bus width user-configurable at device reset via a 10-kΩ resistor pullup/pulldown
resistor on the HD5 pin:
N4
N5
P5
U1
U2
V1
I/O/Z
HD5 pin = 0: HPI operates as an HPI16.
(HPI bus is 16 bits wide. HD[15:0] pins are used and the remaining HD[31:16] pins are
reserved pins in the high-impedance state.)
HD5 pin = 1: HPI operates as an HPI32.
(HPI bus is 32 bits wide. All HD[31:0] pins are used for host-port operations.)
As PCI data-address bus (PCI_EN pin = 1) [C6415 and C6416 devices only]
• Used for transfer of data and address
The C6414 device does not support the PCI peripheral; therefore, the HPI peripheral pins are
standalone peripheral functions, not muxed.
V2
W4
Y3
Y4
AA3
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins are standalone peripheral functions
for this device.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
47
ADVANCE INFORMATION
J1
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) [C64x] or PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) [C6415 or C6416 devices only]
(CONTINUED)
PCI command/byte enable 0 (I/O/Z). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.
For the C6414 device this pin is “Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or
ground).”
PCBE0
W3
I/O/Z
XSP_CS
AD1
O
IPD
PCI serial interface chip select (O). When PCI is disabled (PCI_EN = 0), this pin is tied-off.
For the C6414 device this pin is “Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or
ground).”
CLKX2/
XSP_CLK§
AC2
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI serial interface clock (O) (PCI_EN = 1).
DR2/XSP_DI§
AB3
I
IPU
McBSP2 receive data (I) [default] or PCI serial interface data in (I). In PCI mode (PCI_EN = 1),
this pin is connected to the output data pin of the serial PROM.
DX2/XSP_DO§
AA2
O/Z
IPU
McBSP2 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or PCI serial interface data out (O). In PCI mode
(PCI_EN = 1), this pin is connected to the input data pin of the serial PROM.
GP15/PRST§
GP14/PCLK§
G3
General-purpose input/output (GPIO) 15 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI reset (I). No function at default.
F2
GPIO 14 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI clock (I). No function at default.
GP13/PINTA§
GP12/PGNT§
G4
GP11/PREQ§
GP10/PCBE3§
F1
GPIO 11 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus request (O/Z). No function at default.
L2
GPIO 10 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI command/byte enable 3 (I/O/Z). No function at default.
GP9/PIDSEL§
M3
J3
GPIO 13 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI interrupt A (O/Z). No function at default.
GPIO 12 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI bus grant (I). No function at default.
I/O/Z
GPIO 9 pin (I/O/Z) or PCI initialization device select (I). No function at default.
EMIFA (64-bit) − CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY||
ACE3
L26
O/Z
IPU
ACE2
K23
O/Z
IPU
ACE1
K24
O/Z
IPU
ACE0
K25
O/Z
IPU
ABE7
T23
O/Z
IPU
ABE6
T24
O/Z
IPU
ABE5
R25
O/Z
IPU
ABE4
R26
O/Z
IPU
ABE3
M25
O/Z
IPU
ABE2
M26
O/Z
IPU
ABE1
L23
O/Z
IPU
ABE0
L24
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA memory space enables
• Enabled by bits 28 through 31 of the word address
• Only one pin is asserted during any external data access
EMIFA byte-enable control
• Decoded from the low-order address bits. The number of address bits or byte enables
used depends on the width of external memory.
• Byte-write enables for most types of memory
• Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
APDT
M22
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA peripheral data transfer, allows direct transfer between external peripherals
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins are standalone peripheral functions
for this device.
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
48
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-BIT) − BUS ARBITRATION||
AHOLDA
N22
O
IPU
EMIFA hold-request-acknowledge to the host
AHOLD
V23
I
IPU
EMIFA hold request from the host
ABUSREQ
P22
O
IPU
EMIFA bus request output
AECLKIN
H25
I
IPD
EMIFA external input clock. The EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)
is selected at reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the BEA[17:16] pins.
AECLKIN is the default for the EMIFA input clock.
AECLKOUT2
J23
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 2. Programmable to be EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or
CPU/6 clock) frequency divided-by-1, -2, or -4.
AECLKOUT1
J26
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA output clock 1 [at EMIFA input clock (AECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)
frequency].
AARE/
ASDCAS/
ASADS/ASRE
J25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory read-enable/SDRAM column-address strobe/programmable
synchronous interface-address strobe or read-enable
• For programmable synchronous interface, the RENEN field in the CE Space Secondary
Control Register (CExSEC) selects between ASADS and ASRE:
If RENEN = 0, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASADS signal.
If RENEN = 1, then the ASADS/ASRE signal functions as the ASRE signal.
AAOE/
ASDRAS/
ASOE
J24
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory output-enable/SDRAM row-address strobe/programmable
synchronous interface output-enable
AAWE/
ASDWE/
ASWE
K26
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA asynchronous memory write-enable/SDRAM write-enable/programmable synchronous interface write-enable
ASDCKE
L25
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA SDRAM clock-enable (used for self-refresh mode). [EMIFA module only.]
• If SDRAM is not in system, ASDCKE can be used as a general-purpose output.
ASOE3
R22
O/Z
IPU
EMIFA synchronous memory output-enable for ACE3 (for glueless FIFO interface)
AARDY
L22
I
IPU
Asynchronous memory ready input
EMIFA (64-BIT) − ADDRESS||
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA external address (doubleword address)
AEA22
T22
AEA21
V24
AEA20
V25
AEA19
V26
AEA18
U23
AEA17
U24
AEA16
U25
AEA15
U26
AEA14
T25
AEA13
T26
AEA12
R23
AEA11
R24
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
49
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMIFA (64-BIT) − ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL||
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-BIT) − ADDRESS|| (CONTINUED)
AEA10
P23
AEA9
P24
AEA8
P26
AEA7
N23
AEA6
N24
AEA5
N26
AEA4
M23
AEA3
M24
O/Z
IPD
EMIFA external address (doubleword address)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMIFA (64-bit) − DATA||
AED63
AF24
AED62
AF23
AED61
AE23
AED60
AE22
AED59
AD22
AED58
AF22
AED57
AD21
AED56
AE21
AED55
AC21
AED54
AF21
AED53
AD20
AED52
AE20
AED51
AC20
AED50
AF20
AED49
AC19
AED48
AD19
AED47
W24
AED46
W23
AED45
Y26
AED44
Y23
AED43
Y25
AED42
Y24
AED41
AA26
AED40
AA23
AED39
AA25
AED38
AA24
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFA external data
AED37
AB26
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
50
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFA (64-bit) − DATA|| (CONTINUED)
AB24
AED35
AB25
AED34
AC25
AED33
AC26
AED32
AD26
AED31
C26
AED30
D26
AED29
D25
AED28
E25
AED27
E24
AED26
E26
AED25
F24
AED24
F25
AED23
F23
AED22
F26
AED21
G24
AED20
G25
AED19
G23
AED18
G26
AED17
H23
AED16
H24
AED15
C19
AED14
D19
AED13
A20
AED12
D20
AED11
B20
AED10
C20
AED9
A21
AED8
D21
AED7
B21
AED6
C21
AED5
A22
AED4
C22
AED3
B22
AED2
B23
AED1
A23
I/O/Z
IPU
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AED36
EMIFA external data
AED0
A24
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
51
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
ADVANCE INFORMATION
EMIFB (16-bit) − CONTROL SIGNALS COMMON TO ALL TYPES OF MEMORY||
BCE3
A13
O/Z
IPU
BCE2
C12
O/Z
IPU
BCE1
B12
O/Z
IPU
BCE0
A12
O/Z
IPU
BBE1
D13
O/Z
IPU
BBE0
C13
O/Z
IPU
BPDT
E12
O/Z
IPU
EMIFB peripheral data transfer, allows direct transfer between external peripherals
EMIFB (16-BIT) − BUS ARBITRATION||
BHOLDA
E13
O
IPU
EMIFB hold-request-acknowledge to the host
BHOLD
B19
I
IPU
EMIFB hold request from the host
BBUSREQ
E14
O
IPU
EMIFB bus request output
EMIFB memory space enables
• Enabled by bits 26 through 31 of the word address
• Only one pin is asserted during any external data access
EMIFB byte-enable control
• Decoded from the low-order address bits. The number of address bits or byte enables
used depends on the width of external memory.
• Byte-write enables for most types of memory
• Can be directly connected to SDRAM read and write mask signal (SDQM)
EMIFB (16-BIT) − ASYNCHRONOUS/SYNCHRONOUS MEMORY CONTROL||
BECLKIN
A11
I
IPD
EMIFB external input clock. The EMIFB input clock (BECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)
is selected at reset via the pullup/pulldown resistors on the BEA[15:14] pins.
BECLKIN is the default for the EMIFB input clock.
BECLKOUT2
D11
O/Z
IPD
EMIFB output clock 2. Programmable to be EMIFB input clock (BECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or
CPU/6 clock) frequency divided by 1, 2, or 4.
BECLKOUT1
D12
O/Z
IPD
EMIFB output clock 1 [at EMIFB input clock (BECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock)
frequency].
BARE/
BSDCAS/
BSADS/BSRE
A10
O/Z
IPU
EMIFB asynchronous memory read-enable/SDRAM column-address strobe/programmable
synchronous interface-address strobe or read-enable
• For programmable synchronous interface, the RENEN field in the CE Space Secondary
Control Register (CExSEC) selects between BSADS and BSRE:
If RENEN = 0, then the BSADS/BSRE signal functions as the BSADS signal.
If RENEN = 1, then the BSADS/BSRE signal functions as the BSRE signal.
BAOE/
BSDRAS/
BSOE
B11
O/Z
IPU
EMIFB asynchronous memory output-enable/SDRAM row-address strobe/programmable
synchronous interface output-enable
BAWE/BSDWE/
BSWE
C11
O/Z
IPU
EMIFB asynchronous memory write-enable/SDRAM write-enable/programmable synchronous interface write-enable
BSOE3
E15
O/Z
IPU
EMIFB synchronous memory output enable for BCE3 (for glueless FIFO interface)
BARDY
E11
I
IPU
EMIFB asynchronous memory ready input
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
52
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFB (16-BIT) − ADDRESS||
E16
IPU
BEA19
D18
IPU
BEA18
C18
BEA17
B18
BEA16
A18
BEA15
D17
BEA14
C17
BEA13
B17
BEA12
A17
BEA11
D16
BEA10
C16
BEA9
B16
BEA8
A16
BEA7
D15
BEA6
C15
BEA5
B15
BEA4
A15
BEA3
D14
BEA2
C14
BEA1
A14
− EMIF clock select
BEA[17:16]: Clock mode select for EMIFA (AECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – AECLKIN (default mode)
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 − Reserved
BEA[15:14]: Clock mode select for EMIFB (BECLKIN_SEL[1:0])
00 – BECLKIN (default mode)
01 − CPU/4 Clock Rate
10 − CPU/6 Clock Rate
11 − Reserved
I/O/Z
IPD
− PCI EEPROM Auto-Initialization (EEAI) [C6415 and C6416 devices only]
BEA13:
PCI auto-initialization via external EEPROM
If the PCI peripheral is disabled (PCI_EN pin = 0), this pin must not be pulled up.
0 − PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is disabled (default).
1 − PCI auto-initialization through EEPROM is enabled.
− UTOPIA Enable (UTOPIA_EN) [C6415 and C6416 devices only]
BEA11:
UTOPIA peripheral enable (functional)
0 − UTOPIA disabled (McBSP1 enabled) [default]
1 − UTOPIA enabled (McBSP1 disabled)
The C6414 device does not support the PCI and UTOPIA peripherals; for proper device
operation, do not oppose the internal pulldowns (IPDs) on the BEA13 and BEA11 pins.
Also for proper C6414 device operation, do not oppose the IPDs on the BEA7, BEA8,
and BEA9 pins.
For proper C6415 device operation, the BEA7 pin must be externally pulled up with a
1-k
1-kΩ resistor.
For proper C6416 device operation, the BEA8 and BEA9 pins must be externally pulled
up with a 1-kΩ resistor.
For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
53
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BEA20
EMIFB external address (half-word address) (O/Z)
• Also controls initialization of DSP modes at reset (I) via pullup/pulldown resistors
− Device Endian mode
BEA20:
0 – Big Endian
1 − Little Endian (default mode)
− Boot mode
BEA[19:18]: 00 – No boot
01 − HPI boot
10 − EMIFB 8-bit ROM boot with default timings (default mode)
11 − Reserved
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
EMIFB (16-bit) − DATA||
ADVANCE INFORMATION
BED15
D7
BED14
B6
BED13
C7
BED12
A6
BED11
D8
BED10
B7
BED9
C8
BED8
A7
BED7
C9
BED6
B8
BED5
D9
BED4
B9
BED3
C10
BED2
A9
BED1
D10
BED0
B10
I/O/Z
IPU
EMIFB external data
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 2 (McBSP2)
MCBSP2_EN
AF3
I
IPD
McBSP2 enable pin. This pin works in conjunction with the PCI_EN pin to enable/disable other
peripherals (for more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet).
CLKS2/GP8§
AE4
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 external clock source (CLKS2) [input only] [default] or this pin can also be
programmed as a GPIO 8 pin (I/O/Z).
CLKR2
AB1
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 receive clock. When McBSP2 is disabled (PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN pin = 0),
this pin is tied-off.
CLKX2/
XSP_CLK§
AC2
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or PCI serial interface clock (O).
DR2/XSP_DI§
AB3
I
IPU
McBSP2 receive data (I) [default] or PCI serial interface data in (I). In PCI mode, this pin is
connected to the output data pin of the serial PROM.
DX2/XSP_DO§
AA2
O/Z
IPU
McBSP2 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or PCI serial interface data out (O). In PCI mode, this pin
is connected to the input data pin of the serial PROM.
FSR2
AC1
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 receive frame sync. When McBSP2 is disabled (PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN pin
= 0), this pin is tied-off.
FSX2
AB2
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP2 transmit frame sync. When McBSP2 is disabled (PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN pin
= 0), this pin is tied-off.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins except CLKS2/GP8 are standalone
peripheral functions for this device.
|| These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). The prefix “A” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFA signal
whereas a prefix “B” in front of a signal name indicates it is an EMIFB signal. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of
discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted from the signal name.
To maintain signal integrity for the EMIF signals, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines.
54
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1)
CLKS1/
URADDR3§
AC8
I
McBSP1 external clock source (as opposed to internal) (I) [default] or UTOPIA receive
address 3 pin (I)
CLKR1/
URADDR2§
AC10
I/O/Z
McBSP1 receive clock (I/O/Z) [default] or UTOPIA receive address 2 pin (I)
CLKX1/
URADDR4§
AB12
I/O/Z
McBSP1 transmit clock (I/O/Z) [default] or UTOPIA receive address 4 pin (I)
DR1/
UXADDR1§
AF11
I
DX1/
UXADDR4§
AB11
I/O/Z
McBSP1 transmit data (O/Z) [default] or UTOPIA transmit address 4 pin (I)
FSR1/
UXADDR2§
AC9
I/O/Z
McBSP1 receive frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or UTOPIA transmit address 2 pin (I)
FSX1/
UXADDR3§
AB13
I/O/Z
McBSP1 transmit frame sync (I/O/Z) [default] or UTOPIA transmit address 3 pin (I)
CLKS0
F4
I
IPD
McBSP0 external clock source (as opposed to internal)
CLKR0
D1
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 receive clock
CLKX0
E1
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 transmit clock
DR0
D2
I
IPU
McBSP0 receive data
ADVANCE INFORMATION
McBSP1 receive data (I) [default] or UTOPIA transmit address 1 pin (I)
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 0 (McBSP0)
DX0
E2
O/Z
IPU
McBSP0 transmit data
FSR0
C1
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 receive frame sync
FSX0
E3
I/O/Z
IPD
McBSP0 transmit frame sync
TOUT2
A4
O/Z
IPD
Timer 2 or general-purpose output
TINP2
C5
I
IPD
Timer 2 or general-purpose input
TOUT1
B5
O/Z
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose output
TINP1
A5
I
IPD
Timer 1 or general-purpose input
TIMER 2
TIMER 1
TIMER 0
TOUT0
D6
O/Z
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose output
TINP0
C6
I
IPD
Timer 0 or general-purpose input
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins are standalone peripheral functions
for this device.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
55
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL TEST AND OPERATIONS PHY INTERFACE FOR ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSFER MODE (ATM) [UTOPIA SLAVE]
[C6415 and C6416 devices only]
UTOPIA SLAVE (ATM CONTROLLER) − TRANSMIT INTERFACE
UXCLKY
UXCLAVY
AD11
AC14
I
Source clock for UTOPIA transmit driven by Master ATM Controller.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
Transmit cell available status output signal from UTOPIA Slave.
0
indicates a complete cell is NOT available for transmit
1
indicates a complete cell is available for transmit
O/Z
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
UXENBY
UXSOCY
AE15
AC13
I
◊
UTOPIA transmit interface enable input signal. Asserted by the Master ATM Controller to indicate that the UTOPIA Slave should put out on the Transmit Data Bus the first byte of valid data
and the UXSOC signal in the next clock cycle.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
Transmit Start-of-Cell signal. This signal is output by the UTOPIA Slave on the rising edge of
the UXCLK, indicating that the first valid byte of the cell is available on the 8-bit Transmit Data
Bus (UXDATA[7:0]).
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
O/Z
McBSP1 [default] or UTOPIA transmit address pins
DX1/
UXADDR4§
As UTOPIA transmit address pins UXADDR[4:0] (I), UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 1:
• 5-bit Slave transmit address input pins driven by the Master ATM Controller to identify and
select one of the Slave devices (up to 31 possible) in the ATM System.
AB11
I/O/Z
◊
•
UXADDR0 pin is tied off when the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled [UTOPIA_EN
(BEA11 pin) = 0]
For the McBSP1 pin functions (UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 0 [default]), see the MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1) section of this table.
FSX1/
UXADDR3§
AB13
FSR1/
UXADDR2§
AC9
I/O/Z
◊
DR1/
UXADDR1§
AF11
I
◊
I/O/Z
◊
McBSP1 [default] or UTOPIA transmit address pins
As UTOPIA transmit address pins UXADDR[4:0] (I), UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 1:
• 5-bit Slave transmit address input pins driven by the Master ATM Controller to identify and
select one of the Slave devices (up to 31 possible) in the ATM System.
•
UXADDR0 pin is tied off when the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled [UTOPIA_EN
(BEA11 pin) = 0]
For the McBSP1 pin functions (UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 0 [default]), see the MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1) section of this table.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, these pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
The C6414 device does not support the PCI or UTOPIA peripherals; therefore, these muxed peripheral pins are standalone peripheral functions
for this device.
For the C6415 and C6416 devices, external pulldowns required: If UTOPIA is selected (BEA11 = 1) and these pins are connected to other devices,
then a 10-kΩ resistor must be used to externally pull down each of these pins. If these pins are “no connects”, then only UXCLK and URCLK
need to be pulled down and other pulldowns are not necessary.
◊ For the C6415 and C6416 devices, external pullups required: If UTOPIA is selected (BEA11 = 1) and these pins are connected to other devices,
then a 10-kΩ resistor must be used to externally pull up each of these pins. If these pins are “no connects”, then the pullups are not necessary.
Ψ The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA peripheral; therefore, these standalone UTOPIA pins are Reserved (leave unconnected, do
not connect to power or ground) with the exception of UXCLK and URCLK which should be connected to a 10-kΩ pulldown resistor (see the
square [] footnote).
UXADDR0Y
56
AE9
I
◊
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
UTOPIA SLAVE (ATM CONTROLLER) − TRANSMIT INTERFACE (CONTINUED)
UXDATA7Y
UXDATA6Y
AD10
UXDATA5Y
UXDATA4Y
AD8
UXDATA3Y
UXDATA2Y
AF9
UXDATA1Y
UXDATA0Y
AD9
8-bit Transmit Data Bus
Using the Transmit Data Bus, the UTOPIA Slave (on the rising edge of the UXCLK) transmits
the 8-bit ATM cells to the Master ATM Controller.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), these pins are tiedoff.
AE8
O/Z
AF7
AE7
AD7
UTOPIA SLAVE (ATM CONTROLLER) − RECEIVE INTERFACE
URCLAVY
AD12
AF14
I
Source clock for UTOPIA receive driven by Master ATM Controller.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
Receive cell available status output signal from UTOPIA Slave.
0
indicates NO space is available to receive a cell from Master ATM Controller
1
indicates space is available to receive a cell from Master ATM Controller
O/Z
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
URENBY
AD15
I
◊
UTOPIA receive interface enable input signal. Asserted by the Master ATM Controller to indicate to the UTOPIA Slave to sample the Receive Data Bus (URDATA[7:0]) and URSOC signal
in the next clock cycle or thereafter.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
Receive Start-of-Cell signal. This signal is output by the Master ATM Controller to indicate to
the UTOPIA Slave that the first valid byte of the cell is available to sample on the 8-bit Receive
Data Bus (URDATA[7:0]).
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), this pin is tied-off.
URSOCY
AB14
I
CLKX1/
URADDR4§
AB12
I/O/Z
◊
CLKS1/
URADDR3§
AC8
I
◊
As UTOPIA receive address pins URADDR[4:0] (I), UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 1:
• 5-bit Slave receive address input pins driven by the Master ATM Controller to identify and
select one of the Slave devices (up to 31 possible) in the ATM System.
CLKR1/
URADDR2§
AC10
I/O/Z
◊
•
URADDR1Y
AF10
I
◊
McBSP1 [default] or UTOPIA receive address pins
URADDR1 and URADDR0 pins are tied off when the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled
[UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 0]
For the McBSP1 pin functions (UTOPIA_EN (BEA11 pin) = 0 [default]), see the MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT 1 (McBSP1) section of this table.
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
§ These pins are multiplexed pins. For more details, see the Device Configurations section of this data sheet.
External pulldowns required: If UTOPIA is selected (BEA11 = 1) and these pins are connected to other devices, then a 10-kΩ resistor must be
used to externally pull down each of these pins. If these pins are “no connects”, then only UXCLK and URCLK need to be pulled down and other
pulldowns are not necessary.
◊ External pullups required: If UTOPIA is selected (BEA11 = 1) and these pins are connected to other devices, then a 10-kΩ resistor must be used
to externally pull up each of these pins. If these pins are “no connects”, then the pullups are not necessary.
Ψ The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA peripheral; therefore, these standalone UTOPIA pins are Reserved (leave unconnected, do
not connect to power or ground) with the exception of UXCLK and URCLK which should be connected to a 10-kΩ pulldown resistor (see the
square [] footnote).
URADDR0Y
AE10
I
◊
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
57
ADVANCE INFORMATION
URCLKY
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
IPD/
IPU‡
DESCRIPTION
UTOPIA SLAVE (ATM CONTROLLER) − RECEIVE INTERFACE (CONTINUED)
URDATA7Y
URDATA6Y
AF12
URDATA5Y
URDATA4Y
AF13
AE11
AC11
URDATA3Y
URDATA2Y
AC12
URDATA1Y
URDATA0Y
AD14
AE12
I
8-bit Receive Data Bus.
Using the Receive Data Bus, the UTOPIA Slave (on the rising edge of the URCLK) can receive
the 8-bit ATM cell data from the Master ATM Controller.
When the UTOPIA peripheral is disabled (UTOPIA_EN [BEA11 pin] = 0), these pins are tiedoff.
AD13
RESERVED FOR TEST
G14
ADVANCE INFORMATION
H7
RSV
N20
Reserved. These pins must be connected directly to CVDD for proper device operation.
P7
Y13
RSV
R6
Reserved. This pin must be connected directly to DVDD for proper device operation.
A3
G2
H3
J4
RSV
K6
Reserved (leave unconnected, do not connect to power or ground)
N3
P3
W25
IPD
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
‡ IPD = Internal pulldown, IPU = Internal pullup. (These IPD/IPU signal pins feature a 30-kΩ IPD or IPU resistor. To pull up a signal to the opposite
supply rail, a 1-kΩ resistor should be used.)
External pulldowns required: If UTOPIA is selected (BEA11 = 1) and these pins are connected to other devices, then a 10-kΩ resistor must be
used to externally pull down each of these pins. If these pins are “no connects”, then only UXCLK and URCLK need to be pulled down and other
pulldowns are not necessary.
Ψ The C6414 device does not support the UTOPIA peripheral; therefore, these standalone UTOPIA pins are Reserved (leave unconnected, do
not connect to power or ground) with the exception of UXCLK and URCLK which should be connected to a 10-kΩ pulldown resistor (see the
square [] footnote).
58
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS
A2
A25
B1
B14
B26
E7
E8
E10
E17
E19
E20
ADVANCE INFORMATION
F3
F9
F12
F15
F18
G5
G22
H5
H22
DVDD
J21
S
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
K5
K22
L5
M5
M6
M21
N2
P25
R5
R21
T5
U5
U22
V6
V21
W5
W22
Y5
Y22
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
59
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
AA9
AA12
AA15
AA18
AB7
AB8
AB10
DVDD
3.3-V supply voltage
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
AB17
AB19
AB20
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AE1
AE13
AE26
AF2
AF25
A1
A26
B2
B25
C3
S
C24
D4
D23
E5
E22
F6
F7
CVDD
F20
F21
1.2-V supply voltage (-5E0 device)
1.25-V supply voltage (A-5E0 device)
1.4 V supply voltage (-6E3, A-6E3, -7E3 devices)
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
G6
G7
G8
G10
G11
G13
G16
G17
G19
G20
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
60
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
SUPPLY VOLTAGE PINS (CONTINUED)
G21
H20
K7
K20
L7
L20
N7
P20
T7
T20
U7
ADVANCE INFORMATION
U20
W7
W20
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y10
Y11
CVDD
Y14
Y16
S
1.2-V supply voltage (-5E0 device)
1.25-V supply voltage (A-5E0 device)
1.4 V supply voltage (-6E3, A-6E3, -7E3 devices)
(see the Power-Supply Decoupling section of this data sheet)
Y17
Y19
Y20
Y21
AA6
AA7
AA20
AA21
AB5
AB22
AC4
AC23
AD3
AD24
AE2
AE25
AF1
AF26
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
61
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS
A8
A19
B3
B13
B24
C2
C4
C23
C25
D3
ADVANCE INFORMATION
D5
D22
D24
E4
E6
E9
E18
E21
E23
VSS
F5
GND
Ground pins
F8
F10
F11
F13
F14
F16
F17
F19
F22
G9
G12
G15
G18
H1
H6
H21
H26
J5
J7
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
62
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
J20
J22
K21
L6
L21
M7
M20
N6
N21
N25
P2
ADVANCE INFORMATION
P6
P21
R7
R20
T6
T21
U6
U21
VSS
V5
GND
Ground pins
V7
V20
V22
W1
W6
W21
W26
Y9
Y12
Y15
Y18
AA5
AA8
AA10
AA11
AA13
AA14
AA16
AA17
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
63
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Terminal Functions (Continued)
SIGNAL
NAME
NO.
TYPE†
DESCRIPTION
GROUND PINS (CONTINUED)
AA19
AA22
AB4
AB6
AB9
AB18
AB21
AB23
AC3
AC5
ADVANCE INFORMATION
VSS
AC22
GND
Ground pins
AC24
AD2
AD4
AD23
AD25
AE3
AE14
AE24
AF8
AF19
† I = Input, O = Output, Z = High impedance, S = Supply voltage, GND = Ground
64
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
development support
TI offers an extensive line of development tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, including tools to
evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully
integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of C6000 DSP-based applications:
Software Development Tools:
Code Composer Studio Integrated Development Environment (IDE): including Editor
C/C++/Assembly Code Generation, and Debug plus additional development tools
Scalable, Real-Time Foundation Software (DSP/BIOS), which provides the basic run-time target software
needed to support any DSP application.
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the TMS320C6000 DSP platform, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL). For
information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor.
Code Composer Studio, DSP/BIOS, and XDS are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
65
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Hardware Development Tools:
Extended Development System (XDS) Emulator (supports C6000 DSP multiprocessor system debug)
EVM (Evaluation Module)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
device support
device and development-support tool nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
TMS320 DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320 DSP commercial family member has one of three
prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its
support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from
engineering prototypes (TMX / TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS / TMDS).
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical
specifications
TMP
Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed
quality and reliability verification
TMS
Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX
Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
TMDS
Fully qualified development-support product
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer:
“Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes.”
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability
of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production
devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their
expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type
(for example, GLZ), the temperature range (for example, blank is the default commercial temperature range),
and the device speed range in megahertz (for example, -6E3 is 600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIFA). Figure 5
provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320C64x DSP generation member.
The ZLZ package, like the GLZ package, is a 532-pin plastic BGA only with lead-free balls. The ZLZ package
type is available upon request. For device part numbers and further ordering information for
TMS320C6414/C6415/C6416 in the GLZ and ZLZ package types, see the TI website (http://www.ti.com) or
contact your TI sales representative.
TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments.
66
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
TMS 32
( )
6E3
DEVICE SPEED RANGE
300
5E0 (500-MHz CPU, 100-MHz EMIF)
6E3 (600-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIFA)
7E3 (720-MHz CPU, 133-MHz EMIFA)
Experimental device
Prototype device
Qualified device
Experimental device, MIL
MIL-PRF-38535, QML
High Rel (non-38535)
DEVICE FAMILY
3 or 32 or 320 = TMS320 DSP family
TEMPERATURE RANGE (DEFAULT: 0°C TO 90°C)†
Blank = 0°C to 90°C, commercial temperature
A
= −40°C to 105°C, extended temperature‡
PACKAGE TYPE§
GLZ = 532-pin plastic BGA
ZLZ = 532-pin plastic BGA, with lead-free balls
TECHNOLOGY
C = CMOS
DEVICE¶
C64x DSP:
6411
6414E
6415E
6416E
6414D
6415D
6416D
6414C
6415C
6416C
† See the Recommended Operating Conditions section of this data sheet for more details.
‡ The extended temperature “A version” devices may have different operating conditions than the commercial temperature devices.
See the Recommended Operating Conditions section of this data sheet for more details.
§ BGA = Ball Grid Array
¶ For the actual device part numbers (P/Ns) and ordering information, see the TI website (www.ti.com).
Figure 5. TMS320C64x DSP Device Nomenclature (Including the C6414, C6415, and C6416 Devices)
For additional information, see the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 Digital Signal
Processors Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ011)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
67
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PREFIX
TMX =
TMP =
TMS =
SMX=
SMJ =
SM =
C 6415E GLZ
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
documentation support
Extensive documentation supports all TMS320 DSP family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data sheets,
such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s reference guides for all devices and tools;
technical briefs; development-support tools; on-line help; and hardware and software applications. The
following is a brief, descriptive list of support documentation specific to the C6000 DSP devices:
The TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189) describes the
C6000 DSP CPU (core) architecture, instruction set, pipeline, and associated interrupts.
The TMS320C6000 DSP Peripherals Overview Reference Guide (literature number SPRU190) provides an
overview and briefly describes the functionality of the peripherals available on the C6000 DSP platform of
devices. This document also includes a table listing the peripherals available on the C6000 devices along with
literature numbers and hyperlinks to the associated peripheral documents.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
The TMS320C64x Technical Overview (literature number SPRU395) gives an introduction to the C64x digital
signal processor, and discusses the application areas that are enhanced by the C64x DSP VelociTI.2 VLIW
architecture.
The TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 Digital Signal Processors Silicon Errata (literature
number SPRZ011) describes the known exceptions to the functional specifications for the TMS320C6414,
TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 devices.
The TMS320C6414/15/16 Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA811)
discusses the power consumption for user applications with the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and
TMS320C6416 DSP devices.
The Using IBIS Models for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839) describes how to
properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system.
The How To Begin Development Today With the TMS320C6414, TMS320C6415, and TMS320C6416 DSPs
application report (literature number SPRA718) describes in more detail the compatibility and
similarities/differences among the C6414, C6415, C6416, and C6211 devices.
The tools support documentation is electronically available within the Code Composer Studio Integrated
Development Environment (IDE). For a complete listing of C6000 DSP latest documentation, visit the Texas
Instruments web site on the Worldwide Web at http://www.ti.com uniform resource locator (URL).
68
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
clock PLL
Most of the internal C64x DSP clocks are generated from a single source through the CLKIN pin. This source
clock either drives the PLL, which multiplies the source clock frequency to generate the internal CPU clock, or
bypasses the PLL to become the internal CPU clock.
To use the PLL to generate the CPU clock, the external PLL filter circuit must be properly designed. Figure 6
shows the external PLL circuitry for either x1 (PLL bypass) or other PLL multiply modes.
To minimize the clock jitter, a single clean power supply should power both the C64x DSP device and the
external clock oscillator circuit. The minimum CLKIN rise and fall times should also be observed. For the input
clock timing requirements, see the input and output clocks electricals section.
Rise/fall times, duty cycles (high/low pulse durations), and the load capacitance of the external clock source
must meet the DSP requirements in this data sheet (see the electrical characteristics over recommended
ranges of supply voltage and operating case temperature table and the input and output clocks electricals
section). Table 30 lists some examples of compatible CLKIN external clock sources:
COMPATIBLE PARTS FOR
EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCES (CLKIN)
PART NUMBER
MANUFACTURER
JITO-2
Fox Electronix
STA series, ST4100 series
SaRonix Corporation
Oscillators
SG-636
Epson America
342
Corning Frequency Control
PLL
ICS525-02
Spread Spectrum Clock Generator
MK1714
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Table 30. Compatible CLKIN External Clock Sources
Integrated Circuit Systems
69
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
clock PLL (continued)
3.3 V
CPU Clock
EMI
filter
C1
C2
10 µF
0.1 µF
/2
Peripheral Bus
/8
Timer Internal Clock
/4
CLKOUT4,
McBSP Internal Clock
/6
CLKOUT6
PLLV
CLKMODE0
CLKMODE1
PLLMULT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PLL
x6, x12
CLKIN
PLLCLK
1
ECLKIN_SEL (DEVCFG.[17,16]
and DEVCFG.[15,14])
00 01 10
/4
0
/2
ECLKIN
Internal to C64x
(For the PLL Options, CLKMODE Pins Setup, and
PLL Clock Frequency Ranges, see Table 31.)
EMIF
00 01 10
ECLKOUT1
ECLKOUT2
EK2RATE
(GBLCTL.[19,18])
NOTES: A. Place all PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI Filter) as close to the C6000 DSP device as possible. For the best
performance, TI recommends that all the PLL external components be on a single side of the board without jumpers, switches, or
components other than the ones shown.
B. For reduced PLL jitter, maximize the spacing between switching signals and the PLL external components (C1, C2, and the EMI
Filter).
C. The 3.3-V supply for the EMI filter must be from the same 3.3-V power plane supplying the I/O voltage, DVDD.
D. EMI filter manufacturer TDK part number ACF451832-333, -223, -153, -103. Panasonic part number EXCCET103U.
Figure 6. External PLL Circuitry for Either PLL Multiply Modes or x1 (Bypass) Mode
70
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
clock PLL (continued)
Table 31. TMS320C64x PLL Multiply Factor Options, Clock Frequency Ranges, and Typical Lock Time†‡
GLZ and ZLZ PACKAGE − 23 x 23 mm BGA
CLKMODE
(PLL MULTIPLY
FACTORS)
CLKIN
RANGE
(MHz)
CPU CLOCK
FREQUENCY
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT4
RANGE (MHz)
CLKOUT6
RANGE (MHz)
TYPICAL
LOCK TIME
(µs)§
N/A
0
0
Bypass (x1)
30−75.75
30−75.75
7.5−18.9
5−12.6
0
1
x6
30−75.75
180−454.5
45−113.6
30−75.75
1
0
x12
30−60.6
360−727.2
90−181.8
60−121.2
75
1
1
Reserved
−
−
−
−
−
† These clock frequency range values are applicable to a C64x−6E3 speed device. For −5E0 and -7E3 device speed values, see the CLKIN timing
requirements table for the specific device speed.
‡ Use external pullup resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1 and CLKMODE0) to set the C64x device to one of the valid PLL multiply clock
modes (x6 or x12). With internal pulldown resistors on the CLKMODE pins (CLKMODE1, CLKMODE0), the default clock mode is x1 (bypass).
§ Under some operating conditions, the maximum PLL lock time may vary by as much as 150% from the specified typical value. For example, if
the typical lock time is specified as 100 µs, the maximum value may be as long as 250 µs.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
71
ADVANCE INFORMATION
CLKMODE1 CLKMODE0
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
general-purpose input/output (GPIO)
To use the GP[15:0] software-configurable GPIO pins, the GPxEN bits in the GP Enable (GPEN) Register and
the GPxDIR bits in the GP Direction (GPDIR) Register must be properly configured.
GPxEN =
1
GP[x] pin is enabled
GPxDIR =
0
GP[x] pin is an input
GPxDIR =
1
GP[x] pin is an output
where “x” represents one of the 15 through 0 GPIO pins
Figure 7 shows the GPIO enable bits in the GPEN register for the C6414/C6415/C6416 device. To use any of
the GPx pins as general-purpose input/output functions, the corresponding GPxEN bit must be set to “1”
(enabled). Default values are device-specific, so refer to Figure 7 for the C6414/15/16 default configuration.
31
24 23
16
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP15
EN
GP14
EN
GP13
EN
GP12
EN
GP11
EN
GP10
EN
GP9
EN
GP8
EN
GP7
EN
GP6
EN
GP5
EN
GP4
EN
GP3
EN
GP2
EN
GP1
EN
GP0
EN
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 7. GPIO Enable Register (GPEN) [Hex Address: 01B0 0000]
Figure 8 shows the GPIO direction bits in the GPDIR register. This register determines if a given GPIO pin is
an input or an output providing the corresponding GPxEN bit is enabled (set to “1”) in the GPEN register. By
default, all the GPIO pins are configured as input pins.
31
24 23
16
Reserved
R-0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GP15
DIR
GP14
DIR
GP13
DIR
GP12
DIR
GP11
DIR
GP10
DIR
GP9
DIR
GP8
DIR
GP7
DIR
GP6
DIR
GP5
DIR
GP4
DIR
GP3
DIR
GP2
DIR
GP1
DIR
GP0
DIR
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
Legend: R/W = Readable/Writeable; -n = value after reset, -x = undefined value after reset
Figure 8. GPIO Direction Register (GPDIR) [Hex Address: 01B0 0004]
For more detailed information on general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs), see the TMS320C6000 DSP
General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Reference Guide (literature number SPRU584).
72
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
power-down mode logic
Figure 9 shows the power-down mode logic on the C6414/C6415/C6416.
CLKOUT4
CLKOUT6
Internal Clock Tree
Clock
Distribution
and Dividers
PD1
PD2
IFR
IER
Internal
Peripherals
PWRD CSR
CPU
PD3
TMS320C6414/15/16
CLKIN
RESET
† External input clocks, with the exception of CLKIN, are not gated by the power-down mode logic.
Figure 9. Power-Down Mode Logic†
triggering, wake-up, and effects
The power-down modes and their wake-up methods are programmed by setting the PWRD field (bits 15−10)
of the control status register (CSR). The PWRD field of the CSR is shown in Figure 10 and described in Table 32.
When writing to the CSR, all bits of the PWRD field should be set at the same time. Logic 0 should be used when
writing to the reserved bit (bit 15) of the PWRD field. The CSR is discussed in detail in the TMS320C6000 CPU
and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
73
ADVANCE INFORMATION
PowerDown
Logic
Clock
PLL
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
31
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Reserved
Enable or
Non-Enabled
Interrupt Wake
Enabled
Interrupt Wake
PD3
PD2
PD1
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
ADVANCE INFORMATION
7
9
8
0
Legend: R/W−x = Read/write reset value
NOTE: The shadowed bits are not part of the power-down logic discussion and therefore are not covered here. For information on these other
bit fields in the CSR register, see the TMS320C6000 CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU189).
Figure 10. PWRD Field of the CSR Register
A delay of up to nine cycles may occur after the instruction that sets the PWRD bits in the CSR before the PD
mode takes effect. As best practice, NOPs should be padded after the PWRD bits are set in the CSR to account
for this delay.
If PD1 mode is terminated by a non-enabled interrupt, the program execution returns to the instruction where
PD1 took effect. If PD1 mode is terminated by an enabled interrupt, the interrupt service routine will be executed
first, then the program execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect. In the case with an enabled
interrupt, the GIE bit in the CSR and the NMIE bit in the interrupt enable register (IER) must also be set in order
for the interrupt service routine to execute; otherwise, execution returns to the instruction where PD1 took effect
upon PD1 mode termination by an enabled interrupt.
PD2 and PD3 modes can only be aborted by device reset. Table 32 summarizes all the power-down modes.
74
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
Table 32. Characteristics of the Power-Down Modes
PRWD FIELD
(BITS 15−10)
POWER-DOWN
MODE
WAKE-UP METHOD
000000
No power-down
—
—
PD1
Wake by an enabled interrupt
010001
PD1
Wake by an enabled or
non-enabled interrupt
011100
PD2†
PD3†
CPU halted (except for the interrupt logic)
Power-down mode blocks the internal clock inputs at the
boundary of the CPU, preventing most of the CPU’s logic from
switching. During PD1, EDMA transactions can proceed
between peripherals and internal memory.
Wake by a device reset
Output clock from PLL is halted, stopping the internal clock
structure from switching and resulting in the entire chip being
halted. All register and internal RAM contents are preserved. All
functional I/O “freeze” in the last state when the PLL clock is
turned off.
Wake by a device reset
Input clock to the PLL stops generating clocks. All register and
internal RAM contents are preserved. All functional I/O “freeze” in
the last state when the PLL clock is turned off. Following reset, the
PLL needs time to re-lock, just as it does following power-up.
Wake-up from PD3 takes longer than wake-up from PD2 because
the PLL needs to be re-locked, just as it does following power-up.
All others
Reserved
—
—
† When entering PD2 and PD3, all functional I/O remains in the previous state. However, for peripherals which are asynchronous in nature or
peripherals with an external clock source, output signals may transition in response to stimulus on the inputs. Under these conditions,
peripherals will not operate according to specifications.
C64x power-down mode with an emulator
If user power-down modes are programmed, and an emulator is attached, the modes will be masked to allow
the emulator access to the system. This condition prevails until the emulator is reset or the cable is removed
from the header. If power measurements are to be performed when in a power-down mode, the emulator cable
should be removed.
When the DSP is in power-down mode PD2 or PD3, emulation logic will force any emulation execution
command (such as Step or Run) to spin in IDLE. For this reason, PC writes (such as loading code) will fail. A DSP
reset will be required to get the DSP out of PD2/PD3.
power-supply sequencing
TI DSPs do not require specific power sequencing between the core supply and the I/O supply. However,
systems should be designed to ensure that neither supply is powered up for extended periods of time
(>1 second) if the other supply is below the proper operating voltage.
power-supply design considerations
A dual-power supply with simultaneous sequencing can be used to eliminate the delay between core and I/O
power up. A Schottky diode can also be used to tie the core rail to the I/O rail (see Figure 11).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
75
ADVANCE INFORMATION
001001
011010
EFFECT ON CHIP’S OPERATION
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
I/O Supply
DVDD
Schottky
Diode
C6000
DSP
Core Supply
CVDD
VSS
GND
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Figure 11. Schottky Diode Diagram
Core and I/O supply voltage regulators should be located close to the DSP (or DSP array) to minimize
inductance and resistance in the power delivery path. Additionally, when designing for high-performance
applications utilizing the C6000 platform of DSPs, the PC board should include separate power planes for
core, I/O, and ground, all bypassed with high-quality low-ESL/ESR capacitors.
power-supply decoupling
In order to properly decouple the supply planes from system noise, place as many capacitors (caps) as possible
close to the DSP. Assuming 0603 caps, the user should be able to fit a total of 60 caps, 30 for the core supply
and 30 for the I/O supply. These caps need to be close to the DSP power pins, no more than 1.25 cm maximum
distance to be effective. Physically smaller caps, such as 0402, are better because of their lower parasitic
inductance. Proper capacitance values are also important. Small bypass caps (near 560 pF) should be closest
to the power pins. Medium bypass caps (220 nF or as large as can be obtained in a small package) should be
next closest. TI recommends no less than 8 small and 8 medium caps per supply (32 total) be placed
immediately next to the BGA vias, using the “interior” BGA space and at least the corners of the “exterior”.
Eight larger caps (4 for each supply) can be placed further away for bulk decoupling. Large bulk caps (on the
order of 100 µF) should be furthest away (but still as close as possible). No less than 4 large caps per supply
(8 total) should be placed outside of the BGA.
Any cap selection needs to be evaluated from a yield/manufacturing point-of-view. As with the selection of any
component, verification of capacitor availability over the product’s production lifetime should be considered.
76
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG compatibility statement
The TMS320C6414/15/16 DSP requires that both TRST and RESET be asserted upon power up to be properly
initialized. While RESET initializes the DSP core, TRST initializes the DSP’s emulation logic. Both resets are
required for proper operation.
Note: TRST is synchronous and must be clocked by TCLK; otherwise, BSCAN may not respond as expected
after TRST is asserted.
For maximum reliability, the TMS320C6414/15/16 DSP includes an internal pulldown (IPD) on the TRST pin
to ensure that TRST will always be asserted upon power up and the DSP’s internal emulation logic will always
be properly initialized. JTAG controllers from Texas Instruments actively drive TRST high. However, some
third-party JTAG controllers may not drive TRST high but expect the use of a pullup resistor on TRST. When
using this type of JTAG controller, assert TRST to intialize the DSP after powerup and externally drive TRST
high before attempting any emulation or boundary scan operations.
Following the release of RESET, the low-to-high transition of TRST must occur to latch the state of EMU1 and
EMU0. The EMU[1:0] pins configure the device for either Boundary Scan mode or Normal/Emulation mode. For
more detailed information, see the terminal functions section of this data sheet.
Note: The DESIGN_WARNING section of the TMS320C6414/15/16 BSDL file contains information and
constraints regarding proper device operation while in Boundary Scan Mode.
EMIF device speed
The rated EMIF speed, referring to both EMIFA and EMIFB, of these devices only applies to the SDRAM
interface when in a system that meets the following requirements:
−
1 chip-enable (CE) space (maximum of 2 chips) of SDRAM connected to EMIF
−
up to 1 CE space of buffers connected to EMIF
−
EMIF trace lengths between 1 and 3 inches
−
166-MHz SDRAM for 133-MHz operation (applies only to EMIFA)
−
143-MHz SDRAM for 100-MHz operation
Other configurations may be possible, but timing analysis must be done to verify all AC timings are met.
Verification of AC timings is mandatory when using configurations other than those specified above. TI
recommends utilizing I/O buffer information specification (IBIS) to analyze all AC timings.
To properly use IBIS models to attain accurate timing analysis for a given system, see the Using IBIS Models
for Timing Analysis application report (literature number SPRA839).
To maintain signal integrity, serial termination resistors should be inserted into all EMIF output signal lines (see
the Terminal Functions table for the EMIF output signals).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
77
ADVANCE INFORMATION
While both TRST and RESET need to be asserted upon power up, only RESET needs to be released for the
DSP to boot properly. TRST may be asserted indefinitely for normal operation, keeping the JTAG port interface
and DSP’s emulation logic in the reset state. TRST only needs to be released when it is necessary to use a JTAG
controller to debug the DSP or exercise the DSP’s boundary scan functionality. RESET must be released in
order for boundary-scan JTAG to read the variant field of IDCODE correctly. Other boundary-scan instructions
work correctly independent of current state of RESET.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
bootmode
The C6414/15/16 device resets using the active-low signal RESET. While RESET is low, the device is held in
reset and is initialized to the prescribed reset state. Refer to reset timing for reset timing characteristics and
states of device pins during reset. The release of RESET starts the processor running with the prescribed device
configuration and boot mode.
The C6414/C6415/C6416 has three types of boot modes:
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Host boot
If host boot is selected, upon release of RESET, the CPU is internally “stalled” while the remainder of the
device is released. During this period, an external host can initialize the CPU’s memory space as necessary
through the host interface, including internal configuration registers, such as those that control the EMIF or
other peripherals. For the C6414 device, the HPI peripheral is used for host boot. For the C6415/C6416
device, the HPI peripheral is used for host boot if PCI_EN = 0, and the PCI peripheral is used for host boot if
PCI_EN = 1. Once the host is finished with all necessary initialization, it must set the DSPINT bit in the HPIC
register to complete the boot process. This transition causes the boot configuration logic to bring the CPU
out of the “stalled” state. The CPU then begins execution from address 0. The DSPINT condition is not
latched by the CPU, because it occurs while the CPU is still internally “stalled”. Also, DSPINT brings the CPU
out of the “stalled” state only if the host boot process is selected. All memory may be written to and read by
the host. This allows for the host to verify what it sends to the DSP if required. After the CPU is out of the
“stalled” state, the CPU needs to clear the DSPINT, otherwise, no more DSPINTs can be received.
EMIF boot (using default ROM timings)
Upon the release of RESET, the 1K-Byte ROM code located in the beginning of CE1 is copied to address 0
by the EDMA using the default ROM timings, while the CPU is internally “stalled”. The data should be stored
in the endian format that the system is using. In this case, the EMIF automatically assembles consecutive
8-bit bytes to form the 32-bit instruction words to be copied. The transfer is automatically done by the EDMA
as a single-frame block transfer from the ROM to address 0. After completion of the block transfer, the CPU
is released from the “stalled” state and starts running from address 0.
No boot
With no boot, the CPU begins direct execution from the memory located at address 0. Note: operation is
undefined if invalid code is located at address 0.
reset
A hardware reset (RESET) is required to place the DSP into a known good state out of power-up. The RESET
signal can be asserted (pulled low) prior to ramping the core and I/O voltages or after the core and I/O voltages
have reached their proper operating conditions. As a best practice, reset should be held low during power-up.
Prior to deasserting RESET (low-to-high transition), the core and I/O voltages should be at their proper
operating conditions and CLKIN should also be running at the correct frequency.
78
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
absolute maximum ratings over operating case temperature range (unless otherwise noted)†
Supply voltage ranges: CVDD (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 1.8 V
DVDD (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
Input voltage ranges: (except PCI), VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VIP [C6415 and C6416 only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
Output voltage ranges: (except PCI), VO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.3 V to 4 V
(PCI), VOP [C6415 and C6416 only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −0.5 V to DVDD + 0.5 V
Operating case temperature ranges, TC: (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0C to 90C
(A version) [A-5E0, A-6E3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −40C to105C
Storage temperature range, Tstg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −65C to 150C
† Stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and
functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not
implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
NOTE 1: All voltage values are with respect to VSS.
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core (-5E0 device)‡
1.14
1.2
1.26
V
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core (A-5E0 device)‡
1.19
1.25
1.31
V
CVDD
Supply voltage, Core (-6E3, A-6E3, -7E3 devices)‡
1.36
1.4
1.44
V
DVDD
Supply voltage, I/O
3.14
3.3
3.46
V
VSS
VIH
Supply ground
0
0
0
V
High-level input voltage (except PCI)
2
VIL
VIP
Low-level input voltage (except PCI)
VIHP
VILP
High-level input voltage (PCI) [C6415 and C6416 only]
VOS
Maximum voltage during overshoot/undershoot
TC
Input voltage (PCI) [C6415 and C6416 only]
Low-level input voltage (PCI) [C6415 and C6416 only]
Operating case temperature
Default
V
0.8
V
−0.5
DVDD + 0.5
V
0.5DVDD
−0.5
−1.0§
DVDD + 0.5
V
0.3DVDD
4.3§
V
90
C
0
V
A version (C6414/15/16GLZA-5E0 and GLZA-6E3 only)
–40
105
C
‡ Future variants of the C641x DSPs may operate at voltages ranging from 0.9 V to 1.4 V to provide a range of system power/performance options.
TI highly recommends that users design-in a supply that can handle multiple voltages within this range (i.e., 1.2 V, 1.25 V, 1.3 V, 1.35 V, 1.4 V
with ± 3% tolerances) by implementing simple board changes such as reference resistor values or input pin configuration modifications. Examples
of such supplies include the PT4660, PT5500, PT5520, PT6440, and PT6930 series from Power Trends, a subsidiary of Texas Instruments. Not
incorporating a flexible supply may limit the system’s ability to easily adapt to future versions of C641x devices.
§ The absolute maximum ratings should not be exceeded for more than 30% of the cycle period.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
79
ADVANCE INFORMATION
recommended operating conditions
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
electrical characteristics over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating case
temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TEST CONDITIONS†
PARAMETER
VOH
High-level output voltage (except PCI)
DVDD = MIN,
IOH = MAX
VOHP
High-level output voltage (PCI)
[C6415/C6416 only]
IOHP = −0.5 mA,
DVDD = 3.3 V
VOL
Low-level output voltage (except PCI)
DVDD = MIN,
IOL = MAX
VOLP
Low-level output voltage (PCI)
[C6415/C6416 only]
IOLP = 1.5 mA,
DVDD = 3.3 V
MIN
TYP
ADVANCE INFORMATION
IIP
IOH
Input current (except PCI)
Input leakage current (PCI)
[C6415/C6416 only]§
High-level output current
0.9DVDD¶
V
0.4
0.1DVDD¶
V
±10
uA
50
100
150
uA
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal
pulldown resistor‡
−150
−100
−50
uA
0 < VIP < DVDD = 3.3 V
±10
uA
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
−16
mA
−8
mA
−0.5¶
mA
16
mA
8
mA
PCI/HPI
1.5¶
mA
±10
uA
Timer, UTOPIA, TDO, GPIO (Excluding
GP[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP
EMIF, CLKOUT4, CLKOUT6, EMUx
Low-level output current
V
VI = VSS to DVDD opposing internal
pullup resistor‡
PCI/HPI
IOL
UNIT
V
VI = VSS to DVDD no opposing internal
resistor
II
MAX
2.4
Timer, UTOPIA, TDO, GPIO (Excluding
GP[15:9, 2, 1]), McBSP
IOZ
Off-state output current
VO = DVDD or 0 V
CVDD = 1.4 V, CPU clock = 720 MHz
900
mA
ICDD
Core supply current#
CVDD = 1.4 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
750
mA
550
mA
I/O supply current#
CVDD = 1.2 V, CPU clock = 500 MHz
DVDD = 3.3 V, CPU clock = 600 MHz
IDDD
Ci
Input capacitance
125
mA
10
pF
Co
Output capacitance
10
pF
† For test conditions shown as MIN, MAX, or NOM, use the appropriate value specified in the recommended operating conditions table.
‡ Applies only to pins with an internal pullup (IPU) or pulldown (IPD) resistor.
§ PCI input leakage currents include Hi-Z output leakage for all bidirectional buffers with 3-state outputs.
¶ These rated numbers are from the PCI specification version 2.3. The DC specification and AC specification are defined in Tables 4-3 and 4-4,
respectively.
# Measured with average activity (50% high/50% low power). The actual current draw is highly application-dependent. For more details on core
and I/O activity, refer to the TMS320C6414/15/16 Power Consumption Summary application report (literature number SPRA811).
recommended clock and control signal transition behavior
All clocks and control signals must transition between VIH and VIL (or between VIL and VIH) in a monotonic
manner.
80
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION
Tester Pin Electronics
Output
Under
Test
3.5 nH
Transmission Line
Z0 = 50 W
(see note)
4.0 pF
Device Pin
(see note)
1.85 pF
NOTE: The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its transmission line effects
must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to produce the desired transmission line effect.
The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from
the data sheet timings.
Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the device pin.
Figure 12. Test Load Circuit for AC Timing Measurements
The tester load circuit is for characterization and measurement of AC timing signals. This load does not indicate
the maximum load the device is capable of driving.
signal transition levels
All input and output timing parameters are referenced to 1.5 V for both “0” and “1” logic levels.
Vref = 1.5 V
Figure 13. Input and Output Voltage Reference Levels for AC Timing Measurements
All rise and fall transition timing parameters are referenced to VIL MAX and VIH MIN for input clocks, VOL MAX
and VOH MIN for output clocks, VILP MAX and VIHP MIN for PCI input clocks, and VOLP MAX and VOHP MIN for
PCI output clocks.
Vref = VIH MIN (or VOH MIN or
VIHP MIN or VOHP MIN)
Vref = VIL MAX (or VOL MAX or
VILP MAX or VOLP MAX)
Figure 14. Rise and Fall Transition Time Voltage Reference Levels
signal transition rates
All timings are tested with an input edge rate of 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
81
ADVANCE INFORMATION
42 W
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)
timing parameters and board routing analysis
The timing parameter values specified in this data sheet do not include delays by board routings. As a good
board design practice, such delays must always be taken into account. Timing values may be adjusted by
increasing/decreasing such delays. TI recommends utilizing the available I/O buffer information specification
(IBIS) models to analyze the timing characteristics correctly. If needed, external logic hardware such as buffers
may be used to compensate any timing differences.
For inputs, timing is most impacted by the round-trip propagation delay from the DSP to the external device and
from the external device to the DSP. This round-trip delay tends to negatively impact the input setup time margin,
but also tends to improve the input hold time margins (see Table 33 and Figure 15).
Figure 15 represents a general transfer between the DSP and an external device. The figure also represents
board route delays and how they are perceived by the DSP and the external device.
Table 33. Board-Level Timings Example (see Figure 15)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
Clock route delay
2
Minimum DSP hold time
3
Minimum DSP setup time
4
External device hold time requirement
5
External device setup time requirement
6
Control signal route delay
7
External device hold time
8
External device access time
9
DSP hold time requirement
10
DSP setup time requirement
11
Data route delay
ECLKOUTx
(Output from DSP)
1
ECLKOUTx
(Input to External Device)
Control Signals†
(Output from DSP)
2
3
4
5
Control Signals
(Input to External Device)
6
7
Data Signals‡
(Output from External Device)
8
10
9
11
Data Signals‡
(Input to DSP)
† Control signals include data for Writes.
‡ Data signals are generated during Reads from an external device.
Figure 15. Board-Level Input/Output Timings
82
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS
timing requirements for CLKIN for −5E0 devices†‡§ (see Figure 16)
−5E0
A−5E0
1
2
3
4
PLL MODE x12
PLL MODE x6
UNIT
x1 (BYPASS)
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
24
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
ns
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
ns
Transition time, CLKIN
5
5
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
0.02C
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
§ C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
ns
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
ns
timing requirements for CLKIN for -6E3 devices†‡§ (see Figure 16)
−6E3, A−6E3
PLL MODE x12
NO.
1
2
3
4
PLL MODE x6
x1 (BYPASS)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
20
33.3
13.3
33.3
13.3
33.3
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
0.4C
0.45C
Transition time, CLKIN
5
5
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
0.02C
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
§ C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
ns
ns
ns
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
ns
timing requirements for CLKIN for -7E3 devices†‡§ (see Figure 16)
−7E3
PLL MODE x12
NO.
1
2
3
4
MIN
MAX
33.3
tc(CLKIN)
tw(CLKINH)
Cycle time, CLKIN
16.6
Pulse duration, CLKIN high
0.4C
tw(CLKINL)
tt(CLKIN)
Pulse duration, CLKIN low
0.4C
PLL MODE x6
x1 (BYPASS)
MIN
MAX
13.3
33.3
0.4C
5
5
tJ(CLKIN)
Period jitter, CLKIN
0.02C
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
‡ For more details on the PLL multiplier factors (x6, x12), see the Clock PLL section of this data sheet.
§ C = CLKIN cycle time in ns. For example, when CLKIN frequency is 50 MHz, use C = 20 ns.
MAX
13.3
33.3
0.45C
0.4C
Transition time, CLKIN
UNIT
MIN
ns
ns
0.45C
ns
5
1
ns
0.02C
0.02C
ns
1
5
4
2
CLKIN
3
4
Figure 16. CLKIN Timing
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
83
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT4†‡§
(see Figure 17)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
UNIT
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
1
2
3
4
MAX
0
±175
ps
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 high
2P − 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, CLKOUT4 low
2P − 0.7
2P + 0.7
ns
1
ns
tJ(CKO4)
tw(CKO4H)
Period jitter, CLKOUT4
tw(CKO4L)
tt(CKO4)
Transition time, CLKOUT4
ADVANCE INFORMATION
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
1
4
2
CLKOUT4
3
4
Figure 17. CLKOUT4 Timing
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for CLKOUT6†‡§
(see Figure 18)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
UNIT
CLKMODE = x1, x6, x12
MIN
1
2
3
tJ(CKO6)
tw(CKO6H)
Period jitter, CLKOUT6
0
±175
ps
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 high
3P − 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
tw(CKO6L)
tt(CKO6)
Pulse duration, CLKOUT6 low
3P − 0.7
3P + 0.7
ns
1
ns
4
Transition time, CLKOUT6
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ PH is the high period of CLKIN in ns and PL is the low period of CLKIN in ns.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in nanoseconds (ns)
1
4
2
CLKOUT6
3
4
Figure 18. CLKOUT6 Timing
84
MAX
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for ECLKIN for EMIFA and EMIFB†‡§¶ (see Figure 19)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
1
2
3
4
MIN
6#
tc(EKI)
tw(EKIH)
Cycle time, ECLKIN
Pulse duration, ECLKIN high
2.7
tw(EKIL)
tt(EKI)
Pulse duration, ECLKIN low
2.7
UNIT
MAX
16P
ns
ns
ns
Transition time, ECLKIN
2
ns
5
tJ(EKI)
Period jitter, ECLKIN
0.02E
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are
prefixed by a “B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted.
¶ E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
# Minimum ECLKIN cycle times must be met, even when ECLKIN is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum ECLKIN times are based
on internal logic speed; the maximum useable speed of the EMIF may be lower due to AC timing requirements. On the 7E3 and 6E3 devices,
133-MHz operation is achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met. On the 5E0 devices, 100-MHz operation is
achievable if the requirements of the EMIF Device Speed section are met.
1
5
4
2
ECLKIN
3
4
Figure 19. ECLKIN Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUT1 for EMIFA and
EMIFB modules§¶|| (see Figure 20)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
UNIT
0
MAX
±175
ps
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT1 high
EH − 0.7
EH + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT1 low
EL − 0.7
EL + 0.7
ns
1
ns
1
8
ns
1
8
tJ(EKO1)
tw(EKO1H)
Period jitter, ECLKOUT1
tw(EKO1L)
tt(EKO1)
td(EKIH-EKO1H)
td(EKIL-EKO1L)
Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT1 high
Delay time, ECLKIN low to ECLKOUT1 low
Transition time, ECLKOUT1
ns
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are
prefixed by a “B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted.
¶ E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
|| The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
EH is the high period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns and EL is the low period of E (EMIF input clock period) in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
This cycle-to-cycle jitter specification was measured with CPU/4 or CPU/6 as the source of the EMIF input clock.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
85
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
INPUT AND OUTPUT CLOCKS (CONTINUED)
ECLKIN
1
6
5
3
4
4
2
ECLKOUT1
Figure 20. ECLKOUT1 Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB Modules
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for ECLKOUT2 for the EMIFA
and EMIFB modules†‡§ (see Figure 21)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
5
UNIT
MAX
0
±175¶
ps
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT2 high
0.5NE − 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
Pulse duration, ECLKOUT2 low
0.5NE − 0.7
0.5NE + 0.7
ns
tJ(EKO2)
tw(EKO2H)
Period jitter, ECLKOUT2
tw(EKO2L)
tt(EKO2)
Transition time, ECLKOUT2
td(EKIH-EKO2H) Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT2 high
td(EKIH-EKO2L) Delay time, ECLKIN high to ECLKOUT2 low
1
1
ns
8
ns
6
1
8
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VOL MAX and VOH MIN.
‡ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (64-bit EMIFA and 16-bit EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are
prefixed by a “B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted.
§ E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
N = the EMIF input clock divider; N = 1, 2, or 4.
¶ This cycle-to-cycle jitter specification was measured with CPU/4 or CPU/6 as the source of the EMIF input clock.
5
6
ECLKIN
1
3
2
ECLKOUT2
Figure 21. ECLKOUT2 Timing for the EMIFA and EMIFB Modules
86
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
4
4
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles for EMIFA module†‡§
(see Figure 22 and Figure 23)
NO.
MIN
3
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
4
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
6
tsu(ARDY-EKO1H)
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUTx high
7
th(EKO1H-ARDY)
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUTx high
Rev 1.1 and
earlier
A−5E0
A−6E3
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6.5
6.5
ns
1
1
ns
3
3
ns
1
1.5
ns
Rev 2.0
1.3
1.5
ns
† To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is only recognized
two cycles before the end of the programmed strobe time and while ARDY is low, the strobe time is extended cycle-by-cycle. When ARDY is
recognized low, the end of the strobe time is two cycles after ARDY is recognized high. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width
of the ARDY signal should be wide enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
cycles for EMIFA moduleद# (see Figure 22 and Figure 23)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
5
8
9
UNIT
MAX
tosu(SELV-AREL)
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
RS * E − 1.5
ns
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals invalid
RH * E − 1.9
ns
td(EKO1H-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to ARE valid
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
WS * E − 1.7
ns
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKO1H-AWEV)
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals invalid
WH * E − 1.8
ns
1
7
ns
10
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to AWE valid
1.3
7.1
ns
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
¶ E = ECLKOUT1 period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB
# Select signals for EMIFA include: ACEx, ABE[7:0], AEA[22:3], AAOE; and for EMIFA writes, include AED[63:0].
Select signals EMIFB include: BCEx, BBE[1:0], BEA[20:1], BAOE; and for EMIFB writes, include BED[15:0].
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
87
ADVANCE INFORMATION
−5E0
−6E3
−7E3
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for asynchronous memory cycles for EMIFB module†‡§
(see Figure 22 and Figure 23)
−5E0
−6E3
−7E3
NO.
MIN
ADVANCE INFORMATION
3
Setup time, EDx valid before ARE high
4
tsu(EDV-AREH)
th(AREH-EDV)
6
tsu(ARDY-EKO1H)
7
th(EKO1H-ARDY)
Hold time, ARDY valid after ECLKOUTx high
A−5E0
A−6E3
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
6.2
6.2
ns
Hold time, EDx valid after ARE high
1
1
ns
Setup time, ARDY valid before ECLKOUTx high
3
3
ns
1.2
1.7
ns
Rev 1.1 and
earlier
Rev 2.0
1.3
1.7
ns
† To ensure data setup time, simply program the strobe width wide enough. ARDY is internally synchronized. The ARDY signal is only recognized
two cycles before the end of the programmed strobe time and while ARDY is low, the strobe time is extended cycle-by-cycle. When ARDY is
recognized low, the end of the strobe time is two cycles after ARDY is recognized high. To use ARDY as an asynchronous input, the pulse width
of the ARDY signal should be wide enough (e.g., pulse width = 2E) to ensure setup and hold time is met.
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for asynchronous memory
cycles for EMIFB moduleद# (see Figure 22 and Figure 23)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
5
8
9
10
tosu(SELV-AREL)
toh(AREH-SELIV)
Output setup time, select signals valid to ARE low
RS * E − 1.6
Output hold time, ARE high to select signals invalid
RH * E − 1.7
td(EKO1H-AREV)
tosu(SELV-AWEL)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to ARE valid
Output setup time, select signals valid to AWE low
WS * E − 1.9
toh(AWEH-SELIV)
td(EKO1H-AWEV)
Output hold time, AWE high to select signals invalid
WH * E − 1.7
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
0.9
MAX
ns
ns
6.6
ns
ns
ns
ns
‡ RS = Read setup, RST = Read strobe, RH = Read hold, WS = Write setup, WST = Write strobe, WH = Write hold. These parameters are
programmed via the EMIF CE space control registers.
§ These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
¶ E = ECLKOUT1 period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB
# Select signals for EMIFA include: ACEx, ABE[7:0], AEA[22:3], AAOE; and for EMIFA writes, include AED[63:0].
Select signals EMIFB include: BCEx, BBE[1:0], BEA[20:1], BAOE; and for EMIFB writes, include BED[15:0].
88
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to AWE valid
0.8
UNIT
6.7
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Not Ready
Hold = 2
ECLKOUTx
1
2
1
2
CEx
BE
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
2
1
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
Address
3
4
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
2
Read Data
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
5
5
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
7
7
6
6
ARDY
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 22. Asynchronous Memory Read Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
89
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
ASYNCHRONOUS MEMORY TIMING (CONTINUED)
Setup = 2
Strobe = 3
Hold = 2
Not Ready
ECLKOUTx
9
8
CEx
9
8
BE
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
9
8
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
Address
9
8
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
Write Data
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
10
10
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
7
6
7
6
ARDY
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the asynchronous
memory access signals are shown as generic (AOE, ARE, and AWE) instead of AAOE, AARE, and AAWE (for EMIFA) and BAOE, BARE, and
BAWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ AOE/SDRAS/SOE, ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as AOE (identified under select signals), ARE, and AWE,
respectively, during asynchronous memory accesses.
Figure 23. Asynchronous Memory Write Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB†
90
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING
timing requirements for programmable synchronous interface cycles for EMIFA module†
(see Figure 24)
NO.
MIN
6
tsu(EDV-EKOxH)
th(EKOxH-EDV)
MAX
MIN
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high
3.1
2
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high
1.5
1.5
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for
synchronous interface cycles for EMIFA module†‡ (see Figure 24−Figure 26)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
PARAMETER
programmable
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-CEV)
td(EKOxH-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid
td(EKOxH-BEIV)
td(EKOxH-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid
td(EKOxH-EAIV)
td(EKOxH-ADSV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SADS/SRE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-OEV)
td(EKOxH-EDV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to, SOE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKOxH-EDIV)
td(EKOxH-WEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SWE valid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid
1.3
6.4
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid
ns
4.9
1.3
6.4
ns
1.3
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
1.3
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
− Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
− Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
− CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
− Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
− Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
6.4
ns
4.9
91
ADVANCE INFORMATION
7
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for programmable synchronous interface cycles for EMIFB module†
(see Figure 24)
NO.
MIN
6
tsu(EDV-EKOxH)
th(EKOxH-EDV)
MAX
MIN
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high
3.1
3.1
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high
1.5
1.5
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
ADVANCE INFORMATION
7
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for
synchronous interface cycles for EMIFB module†‡ (see Figure 24−Figure 26)
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
12
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
PARAMETER
programmable
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
6.4
ns
td(EKOxH-CEV)
td(EKOxH-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid
td(EKOxH-BEIV)
td(EKOxH-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid
td(EKOxH-EAIV)
td(EKOxH-ADSV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SADS/SRE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
td(EKOxH-OEV)
td(EKOxH-EDV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to, SOE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
6.4
ns
td(EKOxH-EDIV)
td(EKOxH-WEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SWE valid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid
1.3
6.4
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid
ns
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
1.3
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
1.3
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
− Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
− Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
− CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
− Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
− Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
92
6.4
ns
6.4
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
READ latency = 2
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
2
BE1
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
4
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
EA1
5
EA3
EA2
6
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
EA4
7
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
8
8
9
9
AOE/SDRAS/SOE§
AWE/SDWE/SWE§
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ The read latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCRL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFx CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCRL = 2 and CEEXT = 0.
§ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
− Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
− Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
− CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
− Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
− Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
¶ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during
programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 24. Programmable Synchronous Interface Read Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
(With Read Latency = 2)†‡§
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
93
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE§
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
2
BE1
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
4
EA1
EA2
EA3
EA4
10
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
10
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
BE3
BE4
5
11
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE¶
ADVANCE INFORMATION
3
BE2
AOE/SDRAS/SOE¶
12
12
AWE/SDWE/SWE¶
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ The write latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFx CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 0 and CEEXT = 0.
§ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
− Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
− Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
− CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
− Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
− Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
¶ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during
programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 25. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
(With Write Latency = 0)†‡§
94
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PROGRAMMABLE SYNCHRONOUS INTERFACE TIMING (CONTINUED)
Write
Latency =
1‡
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
2
BE1
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
4
EA1
10
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
EA2
10
EA3
EA4
Q1
Q2
Q3
11
Q4
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE¶
AOE/SDRAS/SOE¶
12
12
AWE/SDWE/SWE¶
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the programmable
synchronous interface access signals are shown as generic (SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE) instead of ASADS/ASRE, ASOE, and ASWE (for
EMIFA) and BSADS/BSRE, BSOE, and BSWE (for EMIFB)].
‡ The write latency and the length of CEx assertion are programmable via the SYNCWL and CEEXT fields, respectively, in the EMIFx CE Space
Secondary Control register (CExSEC). In this figure, SYNCWL = 1 and CEEXT = 0.
§ The following parameters are programmable via the EMIF CE Space Secondary Control register (CExSEC):
− Read latency (SYNCRL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle read latency
− Write latency (SYNCWL): 0-, 1-, 2-, or 3-cycle write latency
− CEx assertion length (CEEXT): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, CEx goes inactive after the final command has been issued
(CEEXT = 0). For synchronous FIFO interface with glue, CEx is active when SOE is active (CEEXT = 1).
− Function of SADS/SRE (RENEN): For standard SBSRAM or ZBT SRAM interface, SADS/SRE acts as SADS with deselect cycles
(RENEN = 0). For FIFO interface, SADS/SRE acts as SRE with NO deselect cycles (RENEN = 1).
− Synchronization clock (SNCCLK): Synchronized to ECLKOUT1 or ECLKOUT2
¶ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AOE/SDRAS/SOE, and AWE/SDWE/SWE operate as SADS/SRE, SOE, and SWE, respectively, during
programmable synchronous interface accesses.
Figure 26. Programmable Synchronous Interface Write Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
(With Write Latency = 1)†‡§
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
95
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles for EMIFA module† (see Figure 27)
NO.
MIN
6
7
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
tsu(EDV-EKO1H)
th(EKO1H-EDV)
MAX
MIN
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high
2.1
0.6
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high
2.5
1.8
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM cycles
for EMIFA module† (see Figure 27−Figure 34)
NO.
1
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
td(EKO1H-CEV)
td(EKO1H-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid
td(EKO1H-BEIV)
td(EKO1H-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid
td(EKO1H-EAIV)
td(EKO1H-CASV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDCAS valid
1.3
td(EKO1H-EDV)
td(EKO1H-EDIV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid
1.3
td(EKO1H-WEV)
td(EKO1H-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDWE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
12
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDRAS valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
13
td(EKO1H-ACKEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to ASDCKE valid (EMIFA only)
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid
14
1.3
6.4
ns
4.9
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
ns
4.9
ns
4.9
ns
1.3
ns
td(EKO1H-PDTV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to PDT valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
4.9
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
96
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for synchronous DRAM cycles for EMIFB module† (see Figure 27)
NO.
MIN
6
7
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
tsu(EDV-EKO1H)
th(EKO1H-EDV)
MAX
MIN
Setup time, read EDx valid before ECLKOUTx high
2.1
2.1
Hold time, read EDx valid after ECLKOUTx high
2.5
2.5
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
NO.
1
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
6.4
ns
td(EKO1H-CEV)
td(EKO1H-BEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to CEx valid
td(EKO1H-BEIV)
td(EKO1H-EAV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx invalid
td(EKO1H-EAIV)
td(EKO1H-CASV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx invalid
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDCAS valid
1.3
td(EKO1H-EDV)
td(EKO1H-EDIV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx valid
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EDx invalid
1.3
td(EKO1H-WEV)
td(EKO1H-RAS)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDWE valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
12
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to SDRAS valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
13
td(EKO1H-ACKEV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to ASDCKE valid (EMIFA only)
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
2
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to BEx valid
6.4
1.3
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to EAx valid
1.3
6.4
ns
6.4
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
ns
6.4
ns
6.4
ns
1.3
ns
14
td(EKO1H-PDTV)
Delay time, ECLKOUTx high to PDT valid
1.3
6.4
1.3
6.4
ns
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
97
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for synchronous DRAM cycles
for EMIFB module† (see Figure 27−Figure 34)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
READ
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
2
BE1
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
AEA[22:14] or BEA[20:12]
AEA[12:3] or BEA[10:1]
4
Bank
5
4
Column
5
4
3
BE2
BE3
BE4
5
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AEA13 or BEA11
6
D1
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
7
D2
D3
D4
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
8
8
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
14
14
PDT§
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
§ PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTS bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT read, data
is not latched into EMIF. The PDTRL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data
phase of a read transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a read can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTRL to 00, 01, 10, or 11,
respectively. PDTRL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 27.
Figure 27. SDRAM Read Command (CAS Latency 3) for EMIFA and EMIFB†
98
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
WRITE
ECLKOUTx
1
2
CEx
2
3
4
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
BE1
4
BE2
BE3
BE4
D2
D3
D4
5
Bank
AEA[22:14] or BEA[20:12]
4
5
Column
AEA[12:3] or BEA[10:1]
4
5
9
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
10
9
D1
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
8
8
11
11
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
14
14
PDT§
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
§ PDT signal is only asserted when the EDMA is in PDT mode (set the PDTD bit to 1 in the EDMA options parameter RAM). For PDT write, data
is not driven (in High-Z). The PDTWL field in the PDT control register (PDTCTL) configures the latency of the PDT signal with respect to the data
phase of a write transaction. The latency of the PDT signal for a write transaction can be programmed to 0, 1, 2, or 3 by setting PDTWL to 00,
01, 10, or 11, respectively. PDTWL equals 00 (zero latency) in Figure 28.
Figure 28. SDRAM Write Command for EMIFA and EMIFB†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
99
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AEA13 or BEA11
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
ACTV
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
4
Bank Activate
5
AEA[22:14] or BEA[20:12]
4
Row Address
5
AEA[12:3] or BEA[10:1]
4
Row Address
5
AEA13 or BEA11
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
12
12
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 29. SDRAM ACTV Command for EMIFA and EMFB†
100
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
DCAB
ECLKOUTx
1
1
4
5
12
12
11
11
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3] or
BEA[20:12, 10:1]
AEA13 or BEA11
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 30. SDRAM DCAB Command for EMIFA and EMIFB†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
101
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
DEAC
ECLKOUTx
1
1
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
4
5
Bank
AEA[22:14] or BEA[20:12]
AEA[12:3] or BEA[10:1]
4
5
12
12
11
11
AEA13 or BEA11
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 31. SDRAM DEAC Command for EMIFA and EMIFB†
102
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
REFR
ECLKOUTx
1
1
12
12
8
8
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3] or
BEA[20:12, 10:1]
AEA13 or BEA11
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 32. SDRAM REFR Command for EMIFA and EMIFB†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
103
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
MRS
ECLKOUTx
1
1
4
MRS value
5
12
12
8
8
11
11
CEx
ABE[7:0] or BBE[1:0]
AEA[22:3] or BEA[20:1]
AED[63:0] or BED[15:0]
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AOE/SDRAS/SOE‡
ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE‡
AWE/SDWE/SWE‡
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE, AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE operate as SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS, respectively, during SDRAM
accesses.
Figure 33. SDRAM MRS Command for EMIFA and EMIFB†
104
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
SYNCHRONOUS DRAM TIMING (CONTINUED)
≥ TRAS cycles
End Self-Refresh
Self Refresh
AECLKOUTx
ACEx
ABE[7:0]
AEA[22:14, 12:3]
AEA13
AED[63:0]
AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/
ASRE‡
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE‡
13
13
ASDCKE
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., the synchronous DRAM
memory access signals are shown as generic ( SDCAS, SDWE, and SDRAS ) instead of ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS (for EMIFA) and
BSDCAS, BSDWE, and BSDRAS (for EMIFB)].
‡ AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, and AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE operate as ASDCAS, ASDWE, and ASDRAS,
respectively, during SDRAM accesses.
Figure 34. SDRAM Self-Refresh Timing for EMIFA Only†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
105
ADVANCE INFORMATION
AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE‡
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOLD/HOLDA TIMING
timing requirements for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles for EMIFA and EMIFB modules† (see Figure 35)
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
NO.
MIN
3
th(HOLDAL-HOLDL) Hold time, HOLD low after HOLDA low
† E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
MAX
E
MIN
UNIT
MAX
E
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the HOLD/HOLDA cycles
for EMIFA and EMIFB modules†‡§ (see Figure 35)
NO.
PARAMETER
MIN
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
2
4
5
6
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
MIN
2E
MAX
¶
0
2E
UNIT
2E
MAX
¶
ns
0
2E
ns
td(HOLDL-EMHZ)
td(EMHZ-HOLDAL)
Delay time, HOLD low to EMIF Bus high impedance
td(HOLDH-EMLZ)
td(EMLZ-HOLDAH)
Delay time, HOLD high to EMIF Bus low impedance
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
Delay time, EMIF Bus low impedance to HOLDA high
0
0
Delay time, HOLD low to ECLKOUTx high impedance
2E
2E
¶
ns
td(HOLDL-EKOHZ)
td(HOLDH-EKOLZ)
2E
¶
Delay time, EMIF Bus high impedance to HOLDA low
2E
ns
7
Delay time, HOLD high to ECLKOUTx low impedance
2E
7E
2E
7E
ns
† E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
‡ For EMIFA, EMIF Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE , ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
For EMIFB, EMIF Bus consists of: BCE[3:0], BBE[1:0], BED[15:0], BEA[20:1], BARE/BSDCAS/BSADS/BSRE, BAOE/BSDRAS/BSOE, and
BAWE/BSDWE/BSWE, BSOE3, and BPDT.
§ The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0,
ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 35.
¶ All pending EMIF transactions are allowed to complete before HOLDA is asserted. If no bus transactions are occurring, then the minimum delay
time can be achieved. Also, bus hold can be indefinitely delayed by setting NOHOLD = 1.
External Requestor
Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
DSP Owns Bus
3
HOLD
2
5
HOLDA
EMIF Bus†
1
4
C64x
C64x
ECLKOUTx‡
(EKxHZ = 0)
ECLKOUTx‡
(EKxHZ = 1)
6
7
† For EMIFA, EMIF Bus consists of: ACE[3:0], ABE[7:0], AED[63:0], AEA[22:3], AARE/ASDCAS/ASADS/ASRE, AAOE/ASDRAS/ASOE, and
AAWE/ASDWE/ASWE, ASDCKE, ASOE3, and APDT.
For EMIFB, EMIF Bus consists of: BCE[3:0], BBE[1:0], BED[15:0], BEA[20:1], BARE/BSDCAS/BSADS/BSRE, BAOE/BSDRAS/BSOE, and
BAWE/BSDWE/BSWE, BSOE3, and BPDT.
‡ The EKxHZ bits in the EMIF Global Control register (GBLCTL) determine the state of the ECLKOUTx signals during HOLDA. If EKxHZ = 0,
ECLKOUTx continues clocking during Hold mode. If EKxHZ = 1, ECLKOUTx goes to high impedance during Hold mode, as shown in Figure 35.
Figure 35. HOLD/HOLDA Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
106
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
BUSREQ TIMING
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for the BUSREQ cycles
for EMIFA and EMIFB modules (see Figure 36)
NO.
2
PARAMETER
td(AEKO1H-ABUSRV)
td(BEKO1H-BBUSRV)
UNIT
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Delay time, AECLKOUTx high to ABUSREQ valid
0.6
7.1
1
5.5
ns
Delay time, BECLKOUTx high to BBUSREQ valid
0.5
6.9
0.9
5.5
ns
ECLKOUTx
1
1
2
2
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
−6E3
A−6E3
−7E3
−5E0
A−5E0
ABUSREQ
BBUSREQ
Figure 36. BUSREQ Timing for EMIFA and EMIFB
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
107
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
RESET TIMING
timing requirements for reset† (see Figure 37)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3, −7E3
NO.
MIN
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL stable)‡
1
tw(RST)
Width of the RESET pulse (PLL needs to sync up)§
16
tsu(boot)
th(boot)
Setup time, boot configuration bits valid before RESET high¶
Hold time, boot configuration bits valid after RESET high¶
17
UNIT
MAX
10P
ns
250
4E or 4C#
µs
4P
ns
ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Setup time, PCLK active before RESET high||
18
tsu(PCLK-RSTH)
32N
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ This parameter applies to CLKMODE x1 when CLKIN is stable, and applies to CLKMODE x6, x12 when CLKIN and PLL are stable.
§ This parameter applies to CLKMODE x6, x12 only (it does not apply to CLKMODE x1). The RESET signal is not connected internally to the clock
PLL circuit. The PLL, however, may need up to 250 µs to stabilize following device power up or after PLL configuration has been changed. During
that time, RESET must be asserted to ensure proper device operation. See the clock PLL section for PLL lock times.
¶ EMIFB address pins BEA[20:13, 11, 7] are the boot configuration pins during device reset.
# E = 1/AECLKIN clock frequency in ns. C = 1/CLKIN clock frequency in ns. Select whichever value is larger for the MIN parameter.
|| N = the PCI input clock (PCLK) period in ns. When PCI is enabled (PCI_EN = 1), this parameter must be met.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during reset†kh (see Figure 37)
NO.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3, −7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
td(RSTL-ECKI)
td(RSTH-ECKI)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
3P + 20E
ns
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKIN synchronized internally
2E
8P + 20E
ns
td(RSTL-ECKO1HZ)
td(RSTH-ECKO1V)
Delay time, RESET low to ECLKOUT1 high impedance
2E
td(RSTL-EMIFZHZ)
td(RSTH-EMIFZV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF Z high impedance
td(RSTL-EMIFHIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFHV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF high group invalid
td(RSTL-EMIFLIV)
td(RSTH-EMIFLV)
Delay time, RESET low to EMIF low group invalid
td(RSTL-LOWIV)
td(RSTH-LOWV)
Delay time, RESET low to low group invalid
td(RSTL-ZHZ)
td(RSTH-ZV)
Delay time, RESET low to Z group high impedance
Delay time, RESET high to ECLKOUT1 valid
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF Z valid
8P + 20E
ns
2E
3P + 4E
ns
16E
8P + 20E
ns
2E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF high group valid
ns
8P + 20E
2E
Delay time, RESET high to EMIF low group valid
0
ns
ns
11P
0
2P
ns
ns
8P + 20E
Delay time, RESET high to low group valid
Delay time, RESET high to Z group valid
ns
ns
ns
8P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
E = the EMIF input clock (ECLKIN, CPU/4 clock, or CPU/6 clock) period in ns for EMIFA or EMIFB.
EMIF Z group consists of:
AEA[22:3], BEA[20:1], AED[63:0], BED[15:0], CE[3:0], ABE[7:0], BBE[1:0], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE,
AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE, SOE3, ASDCKE, and PDT.
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA and BHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ and BBUSREQ; AHOLDA and BHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of:
XSP_CS, CLKX2/XSP_CLK, and DX2/XSP_DO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM (BEA13)
is enabled (with PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN = 0). Otherwise, the CLKX2/XSP_CLK and DX2/XSP_DO
pins are in the Z group. For more details on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section
of this data sheet.
Z group consists of:
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0], CLKX0, CLKX1/URADDR4, CLKX2/XSP_CLK, FSX0, FSX1/UXADDR3, FSX2, DX0,
DX1/UXADDR4, DX2/XSP_DO, CLKR0, CLKR1/URADDR2, CLKR2, FSR0, FSR1/UXADDR2, FSR2,
TOUT0, TOUT1, TOUT2, GP[8:0], GP10/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0, GP13/PINTA,
GP11/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP,
HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, HINT/PFRAME, UXDATA[7:0], UXSOC, UXCLAV,
and URCLAV.
108
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
RESET TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKOUT4
CLKOUT6
1
RESET
18
PCLK
2
3
4
5
6
7
ECLKIN
ECLKOUT1
EMIF Z Group‡§
8
9
10
11
EMIF High Group‡
EMIF Low Group‡
12
13
14
15
Low Group‡
Z Group‡§
Boot and Device
Configuration Inputs§¶
16
17
† These C64x devices have two EMIFs (EMIFA and EMIFB). All EMIFA signals are prefixed by an “A” and all EMIFB signals are prefixed by a
“B”. Throughout the rest of this document, in generic EMIF areas of discussion, the prefix “A” or “B” may be omitted [e.g., ECLKIN, ECLKOUT1,
and ECLKOUT2].
‡ EMIF Z group consists of:
AEA[22:3], BEA[20:1], AED[63:0], BED[15:0], CE[3:0], ABE[7:0], BBE[1:0], ARE/SDCAS/SADS/SRE,
AWE/SDWE/SWE, and AOE/SDRAS/SOE, SOE3, ASDCKE, and PDT.
EMIF high group consists of: AHOLDA and BHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is high)
EMIF low group consists of: ABUSREQ and BBUSREQ; AHOLDA and BHOLDA (when the corresponding HOLD input is low)
Low group consists of:
XSP_CS, CLKX2/XSP_CLK, and DX2/XSP_DO; all of which apply only when PCI EEPROM (BEA13)
is enabled (with PCI_EN = 1 and MCBSP2_EN = 0). Otherwise, the CLKX2/XSP_CLK and DX2/XSP_DO
pins are in the Z group. For more details on the PCI configuration pins, see the Device Configurations section
of this data sheet.
Z group consists of:
HD[31:0]/AD[31:0], CLKX0, CLKX1/URADDR4, CLKX2/XSP_CLK, FSX0, FSX1/UXADDR3, FSX2, DX0,
DX1/UXADDR4, DX2/XSP_DO, CLKR0, CLKR1/URADDR2, CLKR2, FSR0, FSR1/UXADDR2, FSR2,
TOUT0, TOUT1, TOUT2, GP[8:0], GP10/PCBE3, HR/W/PCBE2, HDS2/PCBE1, PCBE0, GP13/PINTA,
GP11/PREQ, HDS1/PSERR, HCS/PPERR, HCNTL1/PDEVSEL, HAS/PPAR, HCNTL0/PSTOP,
HHWIL/PTRDY (16-bit HPI mode only), HRDY/PIRDY, HINT/PFRAME, UXDATA[7:0], UXSOC, UXCLAV,
and URCLAV.
§ If BEA[20:13, 11, 7] and HD5/AD5 pins are actively driven, care must be taken to ensure no timing contention between parameters 6, 7, 14, 15,
16, and 17.
¶ Boot and Device Configurations Inputs (during reset) include: EMIFB address pins BEA[20:13, 11, 7] and HD5/AD5.
The PCI_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user must not switch values throughout device operation.
The MCBSP2_EN pin must be driven valid at all times and the user can switch values throughout device operation.
Figure 37. Reset Timing†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
109
ADVANCE INFORMATION
ECLKOUT2
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT TIMING
timing requirements for external interrupts† (see Figure 38)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(ILOW)
tw(IHIGH)
4P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse low
8P
ns
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse high
4P
ns
Width of the EXT_INT interrupt pulse high
8P
ns
1
2
EXT_INTx, NMI
ADVANCE INFORMATION
MAX
Width of the NMI interrupt pulse low
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
Figure 38. External/NMI Interrupt Timing
110
UNIT
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING
timing requirements for host-port interface cycles†‡ (see Figure 39 through Figure 46)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MIN
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
tsu(SELV-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-SELV)
Setup time, select signals§ valid before HSTROBE low
Hold time, select signals§ valid after HSTROBE low
tw(HSTBL)
tw(HSTBH)
Pulse duration, HSTROBE low
2.4
4P¶
ns
4P
ns
5
ns
2
ns
Setup time, host data valid before HSTROBE high
Hold time, host data valid after HSTROBE high
14
th(HRDYL-HSTBL)
18
tsu(HASL-HSTBL)
th(HSTBL-HASL)
19
ns
Hold time, select signals§ valid after HAS low
tsu(HDV-HSTBH)
th(HSTBH-HDV)
MAX
5
Pulse duration, HSTROBE high between consecutive accesses
Setup time, select signals§ valid before HAS low
tsu(SELV-HASL)
th(HASL-SELV)
UNIT
Hold time, HSTROBE low after HRDY low. HSTROBE should not be
inactivated until HRDY is active (low); otherwise, HPI writes will not complete
properly.
Setup time, HAS low before HSTROBE low
Hold time, HAS low after HSTROBE low
ns
5
ns
2.8
ns
2
ns
2
ns
2.1
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
§ Select signals include: HCNTL[1:0] and HR/W. For HPI16 mode only, select signals also include HHWIL.
¶ Select the parameter value of 4P or 12.5 ns, whichever is greater.
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions during host-port interface
cycles†‡ (see Figure 39 through Figure 46)
NO.
−5E0
−6E3
−7E3
PARAMETER
td(HSTBL-HRDYH)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HRDY high#
7
td(HSTBL-HDLZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD low impedance for an
HPI read
8
td(HDV-HRDYL)
toh(HSTBH-HDV)
Delay time, HD valid to HRDY low
9
Output hold time, HD valid after HSTROBE high
15
td(HSTBH-HDHZ)
Delay time, HSTROBE high to HD high impedance
16
td(HSTBL-HDV)
Delay time, HSTROBE low to HD valid
(HPI16 mode, 2nd half-word only)
6
A−5E0
A−6E3
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
1.3
4P + 8
1.3
4P + 9
2
UNIT
ns
2
ns
−3
−3
ns
1.5
1.5
ns
12
12
ns
4P + 8
4P + 8
ns
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
# This parameter is used during HPID reads and writes. For reads, at the beginning of a word transfer (HPI32) or the first half-word transfer (HPI16)
on the falling edge of HSTROBE, the HPI sends the request to the EDMA internal address generation hardware, and HRDY remains high until
the EDMA internal address generation hardware loads the requested data into HPID. For writes, HRDY goes high if the internal write buffer is
full.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
111
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE†
3
HCS
15
9
7
15
9
16
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HD[15:0] (output)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
8
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 39. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
HAS†
19
11
19
10
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
4
3
HSTROBE‡
18
18
HCS
15
7
9
15
16
9
HD[15:0] (output)
6
1st half-word
8
2nd half-word
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 40. HPI16 Read Timing (HAS Used)
112
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
1
2
2
HCNTL[1:0]
1
1
2
2
HR/W
1
1
2
2
HHWIL
3
3
4
HSTROBE†
HCS
12
12
13
13
1st half-word
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HD[15:0] (input)
2nd half-word
6
14
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 41. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
19
11
11
10
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
11
10
10
HR/W
11
11
10
10
HHWIL
3
4
HSTROBE‡
18
18
HCS
12
13
12
13
HD[15:0] (input)
1st half-word
6
2nd half-word
14
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 42. HPI16 Write Timing (HAS Used)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
113
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE†
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
ADVANCE INFORMATION
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 43. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
18
3
HSTROBE‡
HCS
7
9
15
HD[31:0] (output)
6
8
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 44. HPI32 Read Timing (HAS Used)
114
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
HOST-PORT INTERFACE (HPI) TIMING (CONTINUED)
HAS
1
2
1
2
HCNTL[1:0]
HR/W
3
HSTROBE†
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
ADVANCE INFORMATION
14
HRDY
† HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 45. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Not Used, Tied High)
19
HAS†
11
10
HCNTL[1:0]
11
10
HR/W
3
18
HSTROBE‡
HCS
12
13
HD[31:0] (input)
6
14
HRDY
† For correct operation, strobe the HAS signal only once per HSTROBE active cycle.
‡ HSTROBE refers to the following logical operation on HCS, HDS1, and HDS2: [NOT(HDS1 XOR HDS2)] OR HCS.
Figure 46. HPI32 Write Timing (HAS Used)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
115
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) TIMING [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY]
timing requirements for PCLK†‡ (see Figure 47)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
UNIT
MAX
30 (or 8P§)
tc(PCLK)
tw(PCLKH)
Cycle time, PCLK
Pulse duration, PCLK high
11
tw(PCLKL)
tsr(PCLK)
Pulse duration, PCLK low
11
∆v/∆t slew rate, PCLK
ns
ns
ns
1
4
V/ns
ADVANCE INFORMATION
† For 3.3-V operation, the reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VILP MAX and VIHP MIN.
‡ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
§ Select the parameter value of 30 ns or 8P, whichever is greater.
1
0.4 DVDD V MIN
Peak to Peak for
3.3V signaling
4
2
PCLK
3
4
Figure 47. PCLK Timing
timing requirements for PCI reset (see Figure 48)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
tw(PRST)
tsu(PCLKA-PRSTH)
Pulse duration, PRST
Setup time, PCLK active before PRST high
PCLK
1
PRST
2
Figure 48. PCI Reset (PRST) Timing
116
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
UNIT
MAX
1
ms
100
µs
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
PERIPHERAL COMPONENT INTERCONNECT (PCI) TIMING [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY]
(CONTINUED)
timing requirements for PCI inputs (see Figure 49)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
5
6
tsu(IV-PCLKH)
th(IV-PCLKH)
UNIT
MAX
Setup time, input valid before PCLK high
7
ns
Hold time, input valid after PCLK high
0
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for PCI outputs (see Figure 49)
PARAMETER
MIN
1
2
3
4
td(PCLKH-OV)
td(PCLKH-OIV)
Delay time, PCLK high to output valid
Delay time, PCLK high to output invalid
2
td(PCLKH-OLZ)
td(PCLKH-OHZ)
Delay time, PCLK high to output low impedance
2
MAX
11
Delay time, PCLK high to output high impedance
UNIT
ns
ns
ns
28
ns
PCLK
1
2
Valid
PCI Output
3
4
Valid
PCI Input
5
6
Figure 49. PCI Input/Output Timing
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
117
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
timing requirements for serial EEPROM interface (see Figure 50)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
8
tsu(DIV-CLKH)
th(CLKH-DIV)
9
Setup time, XSP_DI valid before XSP_CLK high
Hold time, XSP_DI valid after XSP_CLK high
UNIT
MAX
50
ns
0
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for serial EEPROM interface†
(see Figure 50)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
ADVANCE INFORMATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
tw(CSL)
td(CLKL-CSL)
Pulse duration, XSP_CS low
td(CSH-CLKH)
tw(CLKH)
tw(CLKL)
tosu(DOV-CLKH)
TYP
ns
0
ns
Delay time, XSP_CS high to XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
Pulse duration, XSP_CLK low
2046P
ns
Output setup time, XSP_DO valid before XSP_CLK high
2046P
ns
2046P
ns
7
toh(CLKH-DOV)
Output hold time, XSP_DO valid after XSP_CLK high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
2
1
XSP_CS
4
5
XSP_CLK
7
6
XSP_DO
8
9
XSP_DI
Figure 50. PCI Serial EEPROM Interface Timing
118
MAX
4092P
Delay time, XSP_CLK low to XSP_CS low
3
UNIT
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING
timing requirements for McBSP† (see Figure 51)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MIN
2
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X ext
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X ext
5
tsu(FRH-CKRL)
Setup time, external FSR high before CLKR low
6
th(CKRL-FRH)
Hold time, external FSR high after CLKR low
7
tsu(DRV-CKRL)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKR low
8
th(CKRL-DRV)
Hold time, DR valid after CLKR low
10
tsu(FXH-CKXL)
Setup time, external FSX high before CLKX low
11
th(CKXL-FXH)
Hold time, external FSX high after CLKX low
4P or 6.67द
0.5tc(CKRX) − 1#
CLKR int
9
CLKR ext
1.3
CLKR int
6
CLKR ext
3
CLKR int
8
CLKR ext
0.9
CLKR int
3
CLKR ext
3.1
CLKX int
9
CLKX ext
1.3
CLKX int
6
CLKX ext
3
UNIT
MAX
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based
on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
§ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
¶ Use whichever value is greater.
# This parameter applies to the maximum McBSP frequency. Operate serial clocks (CLKR/X) in the reasonable range of 40/60 duty cycle.
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
119
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP†‡ (see Figure 51)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
Delay time, CLKS high to CLKR/X high for internal CLKR/X generated
from CLKS input
UNIT
MIN
MAX
1.4
10
4P or 6.67§¶#
C − 1||
C + 1||
ns
ns
1
td(CKSH-CKRXH)
2
Cycle time, CLKR/X
CLKR/X int
3
tc(CKRX)
tw(CKRX)
Pulse duration, CLKR/X high or CLKR/X low
CLKR/X int
4
td(CKRH-FRV)
Delay time, CLKR high to internal FSR valid
CLKR int
−2.1
3
9
td(CKXH-FXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to internal FSX valid
12
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit
from CLKX high
13
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
14
td(FXH-DXV)
ns
ns
CLKX int
−1.7
3
CLKX ext
1.7
9
CLKX int
−3.9
4
CLKX ext
2.0
9
CLKX int
−3.9 + D1
4 + D2
CLKX ext
2.0 + D1
9 + D2
Delay time, FSX high to DX valid
FSX int
−2.3 + D1
5.6 + D2
ONLY applies when in data
delay 0 (XDATDLY = 00b) mode
FSX ext
1.9 + D1
9 + D2
ns
ns
ns
ns
† CLKRP = CLKXP = FSRP = FSXP = 0. If polarity of any of the signals is inverted, then the timing references of that signal are also inverted.
‡ Minimum delay times also represent minimum output hold times.
§ Minimum CLKR/X cycle times must be met, even when CLKR/X is generated by an internal clock source. Minimum CLKR/X cycle times are based
on internal logic speed; the maximum usable speed may be lower due to EDMA limitations and AC timing requirements.
¶ P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
# Use whichever value is greater.
|| C = H or L
S = sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
CLKGDV should be set appropriately to ensure the McBSP bit rate does not exceed the maximum limit (see ¶ footnote above).
Extra delay from CLKX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
Extra delay from FSX high to DX valid applies only to the first data bit of a device, if and only if DXENA = 1 in SPCR.
if DXENA = 0, then D1 = D2 = 0
if DXENA = 1, then D1 = 4P, D2 = 8P
120
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKS
1
2
3
3
CLKR
4
4
FSR (int)
5
6
FSR (ext)
7
DR
8
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
2
3
ADVANCE INFORMATION
3
CLKX
9
FSX (int)
11
10
FSX (ext)
FSX (XDATDLY=00b)
12
DX
Bit 0
14
13†
Bit(n-1)
13†
(n-2)
(n-3)
† Parameter No. 13 applies to the first data bit only when XDATDLY ≠ 0
Figure 51. McBSP Timing
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
121
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for FSR when GSYNC = 1 (see Figure 52)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
tsu(FRH-CKSH)
th(CKSH-FRH)
4
ns
Hold time, FSR high after CLKS high
4
ns
1
2
FSR external
CLKR/X (no need to resync)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
MAX
Setup time, FSR high before CLKS high
CLKS
CLKR/X (needs resync)
Figure 52. FSR Timing When GSYNC = 1
122
UNIT
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXL)
th(CKXL-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX low
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX low
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
1
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
T−2
T+3
ns
L−2
L+3
ns
−2
4
L−2
L+3
12P + 2.8
MAX
20P + 17
ns
ns
4P + 3
12P + 17
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
8P + 1.8 16P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
123
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 53)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Figure 53. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 0
124
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 54)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
MIN
UNIT
MAX
2
th(CKXL-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXH)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX low¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX high#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
−2
4 12P + 4
20P + 17
ns
6
tdis(CKXL-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX low
−2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
1
L−2
L+3
T−2
T+3
ns
ns
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
H−2 H+4
8P + 2 16P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
CLKX
1
2
6
Bit 0
7
FSX
DX
3
Bit(n-1)
4
DR
Bit 0
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 54. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
125
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 0†‡ (see Figure 54)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 55)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXL-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX low to DX valid
6
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
7
tdis(FXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
FSX high
1
MIN
MAX
T−2
T+3
ns
H−2
H+3
ns
−2
H−2
MIN
UNIT
4 12P + 4
MAX
20P + 17
H+3
ns
ns
4P + 3
12P + 17
ns
8
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
8P + 2 16P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
126
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
8
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
Bit 0
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 55. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 10b, CLKXP = 1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DR
(n-2)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
127
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for McBSP as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 56)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MASTER
MIN
4
5
tsu(DRV-CKXH)
th(CKXH-DRV)
Setup time, DR valid before CLKX high
MAX
UNIT
SLAVE
MIN
MAX
12
2 − 12P
ns
4
5 + 24P
ns
Hold time, DR valid after CLKX high
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for McBSP as SPI Master or
Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1†‡ (see Figure 56)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MASTER§
SLAVE
PARAMETER
MIN
UNIT
MIN
MAX
H−2
H+3
MAX
ns
T−2
T+1
ns
2
th(CKXH-FXL)
td(FXL-CKXL)
Hold time, FSX low after CLKX high¶
Delay time, FSX low to CLKX low#
3
td(CKXH-DXV)
Delay time, CLKX high to DX valid
−2
4 12P + 4
20P + 17
ns
tdis(CKXH-DXHZ)
Disable time, DX high impedance following last data bit from
CLKX high
−2
4 12P + 3
20P + 17
ns
1
6
7
td(FXL-DXV)
Delay time, FSX low to DX valid
L−2 L+4
8P + 2 16P + 17
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ For all SPI Slave modes, CLKG is programmed as 1/4 of the CPU clock by setting CLKSM = CLKGDV = 1.
§ S = Sample rate generator input clock = 4P if CLKSM = 1 (P = 1/CPU clock frequency)
= Sample rate generator input clock = P_clks if CLKSM = 0 (P_clks = CLKS period)
T = CLKX period = (1 + CLKGDV) * S
H = CLKX high pulse width = (CLKGDV/2 + 1) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
L = CLKX low pulse width = (CLKGDV/2) * S if CLKGDV is even
= (CLKGDV + 1)/2 * S if CLKGDV is odd or zero
¶ FSRP = FSXP = 1. As a SPI Master, FSX is inverted to provide active-low slave-enable output. As a Slave, the active-low signal input on FSX
and FSR is inverted before being used internally.
CLKXM = FSXM = 1, CLKRM = FSRM = 0 for Master McBSP
CLKXM = CLKRM = FSXM = FSRM = 0 for Slave McBSP
# FSX should be low before the rising edge of clock to enable Slave devices and then begin a SPI transfer at the rising edge of the Master clock
(CLKX).
128
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MULTICHANNEL BUFFERED SERIAL PORT (McBSP) TIMING (CONTINUED)
CLKX
1
2
FSX
7
6
DX
3
Bit 0
Bit(n-1)
4
Bit 0
(n-3)
(n-4)
5
Bit(n-1)
(n-2)
(n-3)
(n-4)
Figure 56. McBSP Timing as SPI Master or Slave: CLKSTP = 11b, CLKXP = 1
ADVANCE INFORMATION
DR
(n-2)
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
129
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
UTOPIA SLAVE TIMING [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY]
timing requirements for UXCLK† (see Figure 57)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
tc(UXCK)
tw(UXCKH)
Cycle time, UXCLK
tw(UXCKL)
tt(UXCK)
Pulse duration, UXCLK low
UNIT
MAX
20
Pulse duration, UXCLK high
ns
0.4tc(UXCK)
0.4tc(UXCK)
0.6tc(UXCK)
0.6tc(UXCK)
ns
2
ns
Transition time, UXCLK
ns
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
1
4
ADVANCE INFORMATION
2
UXCLK
3
4
Figure 57. UXCLK Timing
timing requirements for URCLK† (see Figure 58)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
tc(URCK)
tw(URCKH)
Cycle time, URCLK
tw(URCKL)
tt(URCK)
Pulse duration, URCLK low
MAX
20
Pulse duration, URCLK high
ns
0.4tc(URCK)
0.4tc(URCK)
Transition time, URCLK
0.6tc(URCK)
0.6tc(URCK)
2
† The reference points for the rise and fall transitions are measured at VIL MAX and VIH MIN.
1
4
2
URCLK
3
4
Figure 58. URCLK Timing
130
UNIT
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
ns
ns
ns
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
UTOPIA SLAVE TIMING [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY] (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for UTOPIA Slave transmit (see Figure 59)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
2
3
8
9
UNIT
MAX
tsu(UXAV-UXCH)
th(UXCH-UXAV)
Setup time, UXADDR valid before UXCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, UXADDR valid after UXCLK high
1
ns
tsu(UXENBL-UXCH)
th(UXCH-UXENBL)
Setup time, UXENB low before UXCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, UXENB low after UXCLK high
1
ns
NO.
1
4
5
6
7
10
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
td(UXCH-UXDV)
td(UXCH-UXCLAV)
Delay time, UXCLK high to UXDATA valid
3
12
ns
Delay time, UXCLK high to UXCLAV driven active value
3
12
ns
td(UXCH-UXCLAVL)
td(UXCH-UXCLAVHZ)
Delay time, UXCLK high to UXCLAV driven inactive low
3
12
ns
Delay time, UXCLK high to UXCLAV going Hi-Z
9
18.5
ns
tw(UXCLAVL-UXCLAVHZ)
td(UXCH-UXSV)
Pulse duration (low), UXCLAV low to UXCLAV Hi-Z
3
Delay time, UXCLK high to UXSOC valid
3
ns
12
ns
UXCLK
1
UXDATA[7:0]
P45
P46
P47
P48
H1
3
2
UXADDR[4:0]
0 x1F
N
0x1F
N
0x1F
N+1
0x1F
6
7
4
UXCLAV
5
N
N
9
8
UXENB
10
UXSOC
† The UTOPIA Slave module has signals that are middle-level signals indicating a high-impedance state (i.e., the UXCLAV and
UXSOC signals).
Figure 59. UTOPIA Slave Transmit Timing†
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
131
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for UTOPIA Slave transmit
(see Figure 59)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
UTOPIA SLAVE TIMING [C6415 AND C6416 ONLY] (CONTINUED)
timing requirements for UTOPIA Slave receive (see Figure 60)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
ADVANCE INFORMATION
12
UNIT
MAX
tsu(URDV-URCH)
th(URCH-URDV)
Setup time, URDATA valid before URCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, URDATA valid after URCLK high
1
ns
tsu(URAV-URCH)
th(URCH-URAV)
Setup time, URADDR valid before URCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, URADDR valid after URCLK high
1
ns
tsu(URENBL-URCH)
th(URCH-URENBL)
Setup time, URENB low before URCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, URENB low after URCLK high
1
ns
tsu(URSH-URCH)
th(URCH-URSH)
Setup time, URSOC high before URCLK high
4
ns
Hold time, URSOC high after URCLK high
1
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for UTOPIA Slave receive
(see Figure 60)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
UNIT
MIN
MAX
5
td(URCH-URCLAV)
Delay time, URCLK high to URCLAV driven active value
3
12
ns
6
td(URCH-URCLAVL)
Delay time, URCLK high to URCLAV driven inactive low
3
12
ns
7
td(URCH-URCLAVHZ)
Delay time, URCLK high to URCLAV going Hi-Z
9
18.5
ns
8
tw(URCLAVL-URCLAVHZ)
Pulse duration (low), URCLAV low to URCLAV Hi-Z
3
ns
URCLK
2
1
URDATA[7:0]
P48
H1
H2
H3
0x1F
N+2
0x1F
4
3
URADDR[4:0]
N
0x1F
N+1
7
6
5
URCLAV
N
N+1
10
8
N+2
9
URENB
11
12
URSOC
† The UTOPIA Slave module has signals that are middle-level signals indicating a high-impedance state (i.e., the URCLAV and
URSOC signals).
Figure 60. UTOPIA Slave Receive Timing†
132
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
TIMER TIMING
timing requirements for timer inputs† (see Figure 61)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
tw(TINPH)
tw(TINPL)
Pulse duration, TINP high
2
Pulse duration, TINP low
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
UNIT
MAX
8P
ns
8P
ns
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for timer outputs†
(see Figure 61)
PARAMETER
MIN
3
4
tw(TOUTH)
tw(TOUTL)
UNIT
ADVANCE INFORMATION
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
MAX
Pulse duration, TOUT high
8P −3
ns
Pulse duration, TOUT low
8P −3
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
2
1
TINPx
4
3
TOUTx
Figure 61. Timer Timing
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
133
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
GENERAL-PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT (GPIO) PORT TIMING
timing requirements for GPIO inputs†‡ (see Figure 62)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
tw(GPIH)
tw(GPIL)
Pulse duration, GPIx high
UNIT
MAX
8P
ns
2
Pulse duration, GPIx low
8P
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ The pulse width given is sufficient to generate a CPU interrupt or an EDMA event. However, if a user wants to have the DSP recognize the GPIx
changes through software polling of the GPIO register, the GPIx duration must be extended to at least 12P to allow the DSP enough time to access
the GPIO register through the CFGBUS.
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for GPIO outputs†
(see Figure 62)
NO.
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
MIN
3
tw(GPOH)
tw(GPOL)
24P − 8‡
24P − 8‡
Pulse duration, GPOx high
UNIT
MAX
ns
4
Pulse duration, GPOx low
ns
† P = 1/CPU clock frequency in ns. For example, when running parts at 600 MHz, use P = 1.67 ns.
‡ This parameter value should not be used as a maximum performance specification. Actual performance of back-to-back accesses of the GPIO
is dependent upon internal bus activity.
2
1
GPIx
4
3
GPOx
Figure 62. GPIO Port Timing
134
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
JTAG TEST-PORT TIMING
timing requirements for JTAG test port (see Figure 63)
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
NO.
MIN
1
UNIT
MAX
Cycle time, TCK
35
ns
3
tc(TCK)
tsu(TDIV-TCKH)
Setup time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid before TCK high
10
ns
4
th(TCKH-TDIV)
Hold time, TDI/TMS/TRST valid after TCK high
9
ns
NO.
2
−5E0, A−5E0,
−6E3, A−6E3,
−7E3
PARAMETER
td(TCKL-TDOV)
Delay time, TCK low to TDO valid
MIN
MAX
0
18
UNIT
ns
1
TCK
2
2
TDO
4
3
TDI/TMS/TRST
Figure 63. JTAG Test-Port Timing
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
135
ADVANCE INFORMATION
switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for JTAG test port
(see Figure 63)
SPRS146L − FEBRUARY 2001 − REVISED JULY 2004
MECHANICAL DATA
The following table(s) show the thermal resistance characteristics for the PBGA — GLZ and ZLZ mechanical
packages.
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [GLZ]
NO.
1
°C/W
°C/W
(with Heat Sink‡)
N/A
1.55
1.0
RΘJC
RΘJB
Junction-to-case
Junction-to-board
N/A
9.1
9.0
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
0.00
17.9
13.8
Junction-to-free air
0.5
15.02
8.95
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
1.0
13.4
7.35
6
Junction-to-free air
2.00
11.89
6.46
7
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
N/A
0.5
0.5
2
3
4
5
ADVANCE INFORMATION
Air Flow (m/s†)
8
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
N/A
7.4
7.4
† m/s = meters per second
‡ These thermal resistance numbers were modeled using a heat sink, part number 374024B00035, manufactured by AAVID Thermalloy. AAVID
Thermalloy also manufactures a similar epoxy-mounted heat sink, part number 374024B00000. When operating at 720 MHz, a heat sink should
be used to reduce the thermal resistance characteristics of the package. TI recommends a passive, laminar heat sink, similar to the part numbers
mentioned above.
thermal resistance characteristics (S-PBGA package) [ZLZ]
NO.
1
Air Flow (m/s†)
°C/W
°C/W
(with Heat Sink‡)
N/A
1.55
1.0
RΘJC
RΘJB
Junction-to-case
Junction-to-board
N/A
9.1
9.0
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
0.00
17.9
13.8
Junction-to-free air
0.5
15.02
8.95
Junction-to-free air
1.0
13.4
7.35
6
RΘJA
RΘJA
Junction-to-free air
2.00
11.89
6.46
7
PsiJT
Junction-to-package top
N/A
0.5
0.5
2
3
4
5
8
PsiJB
Junction-to-board
N/A
7.4
7.4
† m/s = meters per second
‡ These thermal resistance numbers were modeled using a heat sink, part number 374024B00035, manufactured by AAVID Thermalloy. AAVID
Thermalloy also manufactures a similar epoxy-mounted heat sink, part number 374024B00000. When operating at 720 MHz, a heat sink should
be used to reduce the thermal resistance characteristics of the package. TI recommends a passive, laminar heat sink, similar to the part numbers
mentioned above.
The following mechanical package diagram(s) reflect the most up-to-date mechanical data released for these
designated device(s).
136
POST OFFICE BOX 1443
• HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443
MPBG175B − OCTOBER 2000 − REVISED FEBRUARY 2002
GLZ (S-PBGA-N532)
PLASTIC BALL GRID ARRAY
23,10
22,90
SQ
20,00 TYP
0,80
0,40
AF
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
Y
0,80
W
V
U
T
R
P
A1 Corner
N
M
0,40
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
9
8
Heat Slug
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
Bottom View
3,30 MAX
1,00 NOM
Seating Plane
0,55
0,45
0,10 M
0,12
0,45
0,35
4201884/C 11/01
NOTES: A.
B.
C.
D.
All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
This drawing is subject to change without notice.
Thermally enhanced plastic package with heat slug (HSL)
Flip chip application only
POST OFFICE BOX 655303
• DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
1
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications,
enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue
any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing
orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms
and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in
accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI
deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all
parameters of each product is not necessarily performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for
their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products
and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right,
copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process
in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services
does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof.
Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property
of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without
alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction
of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for
such altered documentation.
Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that
product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and
is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application
solutions:
Products
Applications
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Automotive
www.ti.com/automotive
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Broadband
www.ti.com/broadband
Interface
interface.ti.com
Digital Control
www.ti.com/digitalcontrol
Logic
logic.ti.com
Military
www.ti.com/military
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Optical Networking
www.ti.com/opticalnetwork
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Telephony
www.ti.com/telephony
Video & Imaging
www.ti.com/video
Wireless
www.ti.com/wireless
Mailing Address:
Texas Instruments
Post Office Box 655303 Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright  2004, Texas Instruments Incorporated